JP2022166553A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the way to show a decorative pattern.SOLUTION: A game machine includes particular performance execution means capable of executing a particular performance after a decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win state and before the ready-to-win performance is executed, a ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to a type of a decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win state, the ready-to-win performance includes a first ready-to-win performance executed without executing a particular performance, and a second ready-to-win performance that is executed after execution of the particular performance and is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first ready-to-win performance, and the particular performance execution means executes a particular performance in a mode for displaying an image related to a character used in the second ready-to-win performance such that a decorative pattern under display cannot be easily visible, and moves a pattern that became a ready-to-win state to a predetermined position in a first operation mode when the first ready-to-win performance is executed and moves the pattern that became a ready-to-win state to a second operation mode more prominent than the first operation mode when the second ready-to-win performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13-13

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 59(C), on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are ready-to-win states. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "3", resulting in "3↓3". After that, as shown in FIG. 59(D), a battle effect is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed, and an image of them fighting is displayed. "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is reduced and moved toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and is temporarily stopped at that position. The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the right sub-display screen 64R while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2020-192464 A

There was room for improvement in how to show the decorative pattern.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of showing a decorative pattern in a better manner.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
a ready-to-win effect execution means for executing a ready-to-win effect suggesting control to the advantageous state after the identification information is in the ready-to-win state;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect after the identification information becomes the ready-to-win state and before the ready-to-win effect is executed;
Depending on the type of identification information that is in the reach state, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The ready-to-win performance includes a first ready-to-reach performance that is executed without executing the special performance and a second ready-to-reach performance that is executed after the special performance is executed and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first ready-to-reach performance. Including reach production and
The special effect executing means executes the special effect in a manner in which an image related to the character used in the second ready-to-win effect is displayed so that the displayed identification information is difficult to see,
When the first ready-to-win performance is executed, the identification information in the ready-to-win state is moved to a predetermined position in a first operation mode, and when the second ready-to-win performance is to be executed, the ready-to-win state is entered. moving the identification information to the predetermined position in a second operation mode that is more conspicuous than the first operation mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a feature, the symbols can be moved in a conspicuous manner, so that the super reach can be enjoyed while understanding the reliability of the symbols.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the game ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the like in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing how the acquired number display in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characterizing part 20SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a first modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production period of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by the ending background image in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the remaining count display and the remaining count notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning generate|occur|produces during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when over winning a prize in the characteristic part 19SH generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by over winning effects in the characteristic portion 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred. It is a figure which shows the other example of production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a mode of approaching before the left and right decoration patterns with characters stop when not controlled to a big win in the fluctuation not controlled to a big win in the normal state in the characteristic part 126SKY. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing that the decoration pattern of the character in the characteristic portion 126SKY is in the ready-to-win state, the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the decoration pattern is already displayed in the close state when switching to the normal screen after losing. be. It is an explanatory diagram showing that the decoration pattern is in a close state when the ready-to-win effect is executed in the characterizing part 126SKY and the normal screen is displayed once after the big hit. Characteristic part 126SKY shows the state of change during right-handed hitting, and after the ready-to-win effect is executed and a big hit is announced, the screen during normal fluctuation displayed before the ready-to-win effect is executed. It is an explanatory diagram showing that the decoration pattern is not in the close state when the screen is shifted to the background screen that was displayed when the transition was made to . FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing that there are a plurality of types of display modes of characters when the character is stopped in the close state, even if the character is a decoration pattern with the same number in the characterizing part 126SKY. Characteristic part 126SKY is set so that 675 is displayed in the initial combination of decorative symbols displayed when the power is restored or when the power is turned on. It is an explanatory diagram showing that 675, which is the initial outcome, may be stopped as a combination of decorative symbols that are lost even in . It is an explanatory diagram of how to recover from power failure for each game state in the characteristic part 126SKY. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of how power failure recovery is performed for each game state in the characterizing portion 126SKY in the characteristic portion 126SKY; It is an explanatory diagram of a time chart of how to recover from power failure for each game state in the characteristic portion 126SKY. It is an explanatory diagram of a time chart of how to recover from power failure for each game state in the characteristic portion 126SKY. It is an explanatory diagram showing that when a specific decorative pattern in the characterizing part 126SKY stops in a close state, a specific decorative pattern combination exclusive effect is executed. It is an explanatory diagram showing that there are a plurality of decorative design patterns so that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the mode of the decorative design at the time of reach in the characterizing part 126SKY. It is a diagram showing a pre-reach production that leads to a ready-to-win with a high waiting level in the characteristic portion 127SKY, and is an explanatory diagram showing how to move the symbol to a predetermined position after entering the ready-to-win state. It is an explanatory diagram showing how a pattern moves to a predetermined position in a reach state with a low degree of expectation among a plurality of reach states in the characterizing part 127SKY. It is explanatory drawing which shows the expectation degree by the movement mode of each reach and decoration design in characteristic part 127SKY. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of the special lever effect executed during reach in the characteristic portion 128SKY. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of the special lever effect executed during reach in the characteristic portion 128SKY. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of the special lever effect executed during reach in the characteristic portion 128SKY. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of the special lever effect executed during reach in the characteristic portion 128SKY. It is an explanatory diagram showing how a real-time image is displayed on the liquid crystal image in the simulated gaming machine image in the characteristic portion 128SKY. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the specific effect in which the active display corresponding to the variation being executed, which is different from the pending display displayed in the pending display area during the third reach in the characteristic portion 129SKY, is used as part of the effect. . It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the specific effect in which the active display corresponding to the variation being executed, which is different from the pending display displayed in the pending display area during the third reach in the characteristic portion 129SKY, is used as part of the effect. . It is explanatory drawing of the ready-to-win production which does not perform specific production|presentation during the 2nd ready-to-win production in characteristic part 129SKY. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of relief production|presentation in the 2nd reach in characteristic part 129SKY. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of relief production|presentation in the 2nd reach in characteristic part 129SKY. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time chart of 2nd reach and 3rd reach in characteristic part 129SKY, and the execution frequency of specific production|presentation and relief production|presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided corresponding to the speaker 8L and 8R portions, respectively. Below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, a display device lower lamp 9f is provided. There is Further, in the vicinity of the general winning openings 10 provided at the lower left three places of the game area, general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are provided.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is defined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning hole is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is. In the jackpot game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed to shoot the game ball to the game area on the right side so as to enter the game ball into the big prize hole formed by the special variable ball game device 7 .

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started.
The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started.
The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. .
If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value.
While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The number of set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value.
Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 042AK)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period of time when the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of winning balls is not increased is performed, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is performed. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, and includes a main lamp 9a, frame lamps 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lower display lamp 9f (the lower left lamp 9fL and the lower right display lamp 9fR), and the general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are all turned on. It is a diagram. In the characteristic portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described later in detail, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, lower display lamp 9f (lower left display lamp 9fL, right lower display lamp 9fR), and general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are sequentially lit from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he/she should hit to the right by letting the player do so.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is ON (step 042AKS001; Yes), a waiting time for the effect at the start of jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS003).
For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. should be stored in After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS004). In addition, the setting for ending the variable probability state and the time saving state is performed (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, the process of clearing the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, and the processing of clearing the special figure variation counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time saving state It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the big hit flag is off at step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of a small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similarly to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made for transmitting the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

Also, when the small hit flag is off at step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to terminate the variable probability state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the special figure fluctuation number count value after the update is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag may be maintained and the processing of step 042AKS013 may be terminated. After performing end determination of such a probability variation state and a time saving state, special design stop processing is complete|finished. In addition, the end determination based on the special figure variation count value is performed only when it is a time saving state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" . Alternatively, for example, from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the probability variable state is extracted, and by referring to the probability variable state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 etc., the probability variable state is terminated. You may make it determine whether to carry out.

FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the ON state in response to the jackpot flag being ON in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is ON at step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game is waiting for the jackpot start effect (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", the predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the production at the start of the big hit is It is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsing determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the effect is waiting for the start of the big hit. , it may be determined that it is not in standby for the performance at the start of the big win in response to the coincidence.

If in step 042AKS022 waiting for the jackpot start effect, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big win start effect at step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the big win start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024) and the big win opening opening number counter is cleared. Then (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature part 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. An opening control pattern different from the type may be set. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable variation" or "non-probability variation", for example, different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2", etc. Different opening control depending on the jackpot type May be set in a pattern.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting until the opening of the big winning opening in the next round (waiting for next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open standby end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next open standby is in progress. If so, it can be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next opening at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), it proceeds to step 042AKS023 and updates the game control process timer value. In addition, the game control process timer value updated at step 042AKS023 is the time set as the wait time at the start of the jackpot at step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined that the next opening is not in progress at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the large winning opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, etc., and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning prize A special winning opening opening time is set as the upper limit of the time during which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, when a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is set to the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a designation command during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the big hit open process. After updating to 5″ (step 042AKS031), the big winning opening pre-opening process is terminated.

FIG. 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during jackpot opening. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). At step 042AKS041, if there is no winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, at step 042AKS041, if there is a winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the big winning hole. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning prize number count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening of the big winning opening, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045 (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined solenoid for the door of the large winning opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening is closed. (Step 042AKS046), and clear the winning number count value (Step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the specified command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is changed after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the process during big hit opening is ended.

In this way, special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 10-2, big hit opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, big hit opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including jackpot opening post-processing, jackpot end processing, etc.) is executed, the transmission setting of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning mouth opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning mouth opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , timings such as the start of the big win, the opening (start of the round) and closing (end of the round) of the big win, the winning of the big win and the end of the big win.

FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing performed within the effect processing during the big hit in step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command is received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined that the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in FIG. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the effect during the big hit and executing the ending effect.

If it is determined that the hit end designation command is not received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the nR was started (elapsed of the nR predetermined period). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and its initial value is "1" and is incremented one by one in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068.
The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game. When the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has passed since the nR-th round started. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the large winning opening is completely open (detection that the large winning opening door has moved to the position where it is completely open) A designated command during the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted, and counting of a timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the round game of the first round is started, the obtained number display indicating the number of obtained balls and the round indicating the number of rounds are displayed. display is performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the big win to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending), every time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the big winning opening is received, the winning number is obtained. is continuously added by 15. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number. It takes a predetermined period of time to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be completed in time for the wins from the start of the first round game until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , the process of displaying "0015" may not keep up with the process of displaying "0015" despite winning ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, 0.6 seconds is provided as a predetermined period, and when the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening at the opening timing wins from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed In addition, a period is secured in which "0015" is directly displayed without "0000" being displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing. Taking this into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously shot game balls to enter the big winning opening is the shooting interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the big winning opening is one after the opening of the big winning opening until the number of wins is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to an increase in the winning number display at the timing when the round number display is started due to an increase in the winning number in the state before the winning number display and the round number display are performed. can do. Although the predetermined period in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not passed after starting the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and incremented by 1 in step 042AKS066, and "1" is reached in step 042AKS068. cleared to In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n=1 by checking the value of n.

When it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect to suggest that the player should hit to the right, and also suggests that a big hit game state has occurred. The operation control of the fanfare effect is performed (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R. (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit production corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the processing of step 042AKS056, the prize winning is determined for a predetermined period from the start of the nR. When the winning designation command is not received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. is incremented by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 to be described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called continuous game, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end timing of the continuous game. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). It should be noted that the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, a mode (winning The light is emitted in a manner that notifies that the Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game amusement can be improved. Regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time at the time of winning may be larger than that at the time of the jackpot effect. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, in addition to lighting the attacker lamp 9c, a winning sound is output. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning slot, and the game amusement can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n=1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of winning balls added at step 042AKS057 is displayed (display the number of winning), and the number of winning is displayed. After updating the display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. It should be noted that in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the processing of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls that was added in step 042AKS057 as it is, As shown in 12(a-23), after performing a count-up display (notifying display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the increase in the number of winning balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When it is determined that a predetermined period has passed since the nR was started in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. , and, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the nR-th big hit is performed (step 042AKS061). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round, the display of the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions is performed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed at step 042AKS061. Specifically, when the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period elapses, the winning number is incremented by "15" at step 042AKS057. ), the number of wins has not increased in this big win since the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins is increasing) is performed as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21). Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the predetermined display indicating (as a specific display) (You can do this after uploading.) On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in this big hit. -22), as a predetermined display, display of the number of winnings (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased (in the case of consecutive games, the number of winnings at the time of the previous big win is displayed); display). In addition to "0000", the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased may be a display other than a number, such as "----" or "not increased". You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, and the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning hole. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately displayed. , and the production effect lamp 9 emits more light than during the predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. The production can be livened up and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the big win, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command is received, that is, whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS063), The attacking card 9c is illuminated, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, a count-up display (notifying display that the winning number increases) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or when the winning designation command is not received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R which is the next round of the nR has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined by whether or not a special winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the (n+1)th R is received from the main board 11 side. When the n+1R has not started, that is, when the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. . On the other hand, when the n+1R starts, that is, when the large winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and then various display processes exit. For example, if n=1, ie the first round, then n=2 at step 042AKS066. Although n=2 and this is the second round, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053 until the predetermined period has elapsed, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR-th round, is performed (displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061 after determination of Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined at step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end of the big hit effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and terminate various display processes.

Next, display timings such as the display of the number of rounds and the display of the number of wins, and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows a case of a so-called first win (first big win) instead of a consecutive game.

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when a combination of decoration symbols constituting a big win is stopped and displayed, a big win game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-7(b-1), the big winning opening is closed. In addition, in order to notify the player of the big hit, as shown in FIG. Various production effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 .

When the jackpot hits, as shown in FIG. 10-6, during the period until the predetermined period of the first round ends, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to inform the player that the player should hit right (FIG. 10-6). 5 step 042AKS054). The period from the big win to the start of the 1st R shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. All the production effect lamps 9 are turned off once. Then, the performance effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-handed performance is performed by displaying "Right-handed" in a large size on the image display device. Incidentally, the small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. Display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamps 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the game area is first lit, followed by FIG. 10-7 ( As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the lower left frame lamp 9, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part 9eL lights up.
In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the upper left side. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), since the big winning hole is in a closed state, the launched game medium does not enter the big winning hole at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the launched game ball passes through the second path in the upper portion of the large winning opening door and is led to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the central upper part of the game board 2 lights up, and FIG. 10-8 (c-9 ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper central portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion lights up, and then as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right portion 9 is lit, and as shown in FIG. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the lower right side. As a result, the performance effect lamp 9 is lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, and then the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the player hits right on the performance effect lamp 9. A right-handed production that suggests will be performed. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right-hand shot. may be In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 is lit from the lower left side to the center and to the lower right direction, and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 alone is lit from the lower left side to the center and right. Both of them may be lit simultaneously or with a time lag, such as lighting downward.

After the right hitting effect on the effect lamp 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are extinguished as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the display of hitting to the right on the image display device 5 continues (the effect of hitting to the right is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning opening comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed, and until a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indices such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, the As shown in (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest a right-hand shot. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the big prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be made faster). In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without turning off the light. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), when the big winning opening is completely opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and FIG. As shown in (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. Before the 1st R is started (before the big winning hole is opened), the game ball launched by performing the right-handed effect (game ball hit early) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists in the upper part of the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st round. On the side of the effect control board 12, by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), and FIG. 10-10 (c-18) 2, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that a prize has been won. In addition, as described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is performed in a manner that is more than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light during the jackpot middle effect, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. example. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be prevented without making the player feel uneasy. can be prevented.

10-10 (b-18) after the game ball has entered the big winning opening, or time has passed without winning from the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19) after a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. Since the execution timing has come and the execution timing for displaying the number of acquisitions has come, the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning opening before the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the second The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed.
In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as an effect during the big hit (effect during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. In addition, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit displayed as the production during the jackpot (production during the 1st R) and the display of "during BOUNUS" are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 10 to 20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right as shown at 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), a fanfare or right-handed effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the big winning opening is opened, the effect during the big win is shown in FIG. 10-21. As shown in (A-2), a symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, is displayed facing the front, and is displayed above "B" in the display of "BOUNUS". A star image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back right, and " A star-shaped image shifts to the top of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back left. , a star-shaped image shifts to the top of . Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "S" in the display of "BOUNUS". The shape image shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the big win effect, the decoration patterns constituting the big win are moved in the right back direction, the front direction, and the left back direction, and the star-shaped image is displayed rightward from the characters on the left of the display of "BOUNUS". This suggests to the player that he should hit to the right by shifting the . The action display of decorative patterns and the transitional display of the star-shaped image, which constitute the jackpot, are referred to as effect display. It includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the ball to the right, making it easier to recognize the hitting to the right.

In addition, during the big-hit production, the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20). In this example, a light emission pattern is set in which the effect lamps 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, the effect lamp 9 does not emit light as shown in FIGS. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lit after the display of the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time has elapsed is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed without the game ball entering the big winning slot, as shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the predetermined light emission pattern according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening in the 1R, the upper limit that can open the big winning opening period. In addition, along with the winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and FIG. 10-12 (a-24). As shown in , the acquisition number display of "0150" is performed. In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner notifying that a prize has been won. Incidentally, the upper limit period for which the big winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted from the elapse of the predetermined period for the winning of 10 game balls. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the interval between consecutive shots is 0.6 seconds, it is a period in which 10 prizes can be won. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize hole in the 1st R, the maximum period in which the big prize hole can be opened is reached, so the big prize hole is opened as shown in FIG. controlled to be closed. After that, until the second R shown in FIG. 10-6 is started, the big winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the 2nd R elapses (until the predetermined period of time elapses after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed as shown in FIG. , the effect during the big win is continuously performed (the display of the winning number is updated according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the effect during the big win as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25). to light up.

In the 1st round, when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed. There is a case where a so-called over-winning in which the ball enters the big winning opening following the 10th game ball may occur. Even in the case of over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-win has occurred in the 1st round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine whether the winning corresponds to the opening of the round. easier. Also, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10", the over-winning sound may be output. Also, the attacker lamp 9c may emit light in a mode corresponding to an over-win, which is different from light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the timing comes when the big winning hole is opened again, and the big winning hole is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). controlled to be At this time, it is determined as Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, as shown in FIG. A display is made (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), when the big winning hole is completely opened and the game ball enters the big winning hole, unlike the first R, the step of FIG. 10-5 In the processing of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the acquisition number display of "0165" is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the 1st round, even if the prize is won during a predetermined period, the winning number is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the 2R predetermined period elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. ' is displayed, and a big win middle effect corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the second R predetermined period elapses. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common jackpot production is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the production effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The performance during the jackpot to be played may be varied. The lighting of the production effect lamp 9 is the same. In this way, since the big winning hole is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize mouth. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the continuously shot game balls will win the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the opening of the big winning opening is controlled corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 10-13 (a-29) ), (b-29), and (c-29), when a predetermined period of time has passed without the game ball winning after the big winning hole is completely opened, FIG. 10-14 (a-31) ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of wins acquired in the 1st R is displayed continuously. Thereafter, similar processing is performed up to the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command is received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if no prize is won within a predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, while if a prize is won during the predetermined period , the number of obtained balls is added to the display of the number of obtained balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning slot.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and reaches the upper limit period, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 10-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round Winning of game balls occurs. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a-21), "0015" may be displayed as the display of the acquired number after performing the count-up display. Also, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win a prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize). As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed as the acquired number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the game interest.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time after the first round is started with the big winning opening opened. Then, if the game ball does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, a predetermined display indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed after the predetermined period. When a game ball wins a prize in a big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the obtained number is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the game ball wins the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, directly specifies without displaying the winning number of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the acquisition number display of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as a notification display that the number of winnings increases when the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , display the acquired number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the large winning opening. is started, and the acquired number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, the predetermined period is preferably counted, and when the prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1, by closing the large winning opening door, guides the launched game ball to the discharge route through the second route of the upper part of the large winning opening door, By opening the winning opening door, the shot game ball is guided to the big winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. - 特許庁The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the game is interesting without giving the player a sense of unease. can be prevented from decreasing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect is displayed to the player to indicate that he/she should hit to the right. According to this, since the game area to be shot during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side transmits a designation command while the big winning opening is open. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the game ball (fast-hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the 1st R starts (before the big winning hole is opened) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R, and the effect control CPU 120, when winning within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period, the specific Acquisition number display as display is performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 10-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round A game ball wins, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number as a specific display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that a big win game state has been reached while the big winning hole is in a closed state and then in an open state. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the winning number display and the round number display can be performed, and an effect during the big win corresponding to the round game can be executed. According to this, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even if the game ball wins in the big winning hole other than the predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23), the attacker lamp Light 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the fact that the prize has been won within the predetermined period can be visually recognized. easier.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. Light is emitted in a mode (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won) that is more than the number of times of light emission per time. According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120, when a game ball enters the big winning opening during a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning opening, A winning sound corresponding to winning is output. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins in the big winning hole outside the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning hole opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the round game after the second round is performed, if the game medium does not win the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the opening state of the big winning opening, as shown in FIG. As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the display of the winning number displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed, and at the same time, the game medium wins in the big winning slot within the predetermined period. , as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), adds the number of winning balls given corresponding to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game and displays it. According to this, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so that it is easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big winning hole, in a situation where the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) or ( As shown in c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multiple game machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the subsequent production and improve the amusement of the game.

10-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round. 10-7(c-3) to 10-9(c-13), the production effect lamp 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, Regarding, for example, as shown in FIGS. The lamps 9 are lit alternately. According to this, the production effect lamp 9 can be used to suggest a right-hand shot. In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without extinguishing the light, thereby making the player aware that the big winning hole is in the open state.

Also, the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is a period sufficient for ten game balls to win even if counted after the predetermined period has passed. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is illuminated after the display of the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed. Let According to this, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the launch timing.

10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production control CPU 120 emits the production effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the jackpot after the elapse of the predetermined period. Let According to this, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, displays the effect display of transitional display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute the big win, suggesting hitting to the right. mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, and the player can easily recognize that the ball should be hit to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 turn on in order to suggest that the player should hit to the right. Although the example of turning off all the effect lamps 9 after the right-handed effect by the effect lamps 9 is completed, this is just an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 10-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)) where the big winning hole is opened, the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be lit. According to this, it is possible for the player to easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be lit continuously until a predetermined period elapses or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning hole is closed, the display of "1" out of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. It should be noted that the same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the maximum number of prizes to be won is 10 (maximum number of prizes to be won is 10), which is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened. , it may be arranged that if two coins are received within a predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over-win is awarded.
In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for the over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of the over winning. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of counting the number of game balls entering the big winning hole is shown for the display of the winning number. good too. Since the right-handed ball is hit during the big hit, the general winning hole for winning the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIGS. 10-18 are flow charts showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 during the big win. The description of the same parts as in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS056 (step 042AKS056; No), a general winning showing that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10 It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( step 042AKS082). After executing the processing of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the processing of step 042AKS059 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not a general winning designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( Step 042AKS083), update display of the acquired number (step 042AKS085). When performing the acquired number update display in step 042 AKS085, the acquired number display is performed after performing the display of counting up (notifying display that the acquired number increases). After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing of step 042AKS065 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of an effect operation and the like in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are shown in Figure 10-10 ( a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, it shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). 10-19 (b-18A), after the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, or from the state shown in FIG. Time passes without winning the winning opening 10, and when a predetermined period of time elapses as shown in FIGS. When a prize is won in mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. , the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and a count-up display is performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. During the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquired number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without the game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the predetermined light emission pattern according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Thus, even if the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined After the period has passed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning slot 10. FIG. Further, when no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, the winning number corresponding to the winning is also displayed for the game balls that have won the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can change between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given by winning a game medium to the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and When the game medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display when the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, "0015" may be displayed instead of "0000").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means provides the game value when a game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating the above, a display corresponding to the game value given as the specific display is performed (for example, after performing a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases, "0015" , etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins will increase.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means displays a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. After the predetermined period of time has passed after the reception, the display of the amount to be awarded is started (for example, counting of the timer value for the predetermined period is started from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 side. etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is preferably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable prize winning means is in the first state to lead the game medium to a prize winning path through a first path (for example, a large prize winning path). By opening the winning opening door, the fired game ball is led to the first path and leading to the big winning opening, etc.), and the second state is established to lead the game medium to the discharge path. Path forming means including 2 paths (for example, by closing the big winning gate door, the launched game ball is guided to the ejection path by passing through the second path in the upper part of the big winning gate door) and detection means (e.g., count switch 23, etc.) formed in the winning path for detecting the winning of the game medium, wherein the time from the path forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the big winning hole, so that the game can be enjoyed without making the player feel uneasy. A decrease can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state, Performing an operation prompting display for promoting the operation (for example, during the period from the big win to the opening of the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3), the game to indicate to the player that they should hit right).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which a variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side may transmit a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation prompting display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the shot game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a game ball shot by performing a right-handed effect before the first round is started). However, it is possible to win a prize at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game media shot before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the final round game among the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball as shown in FIGS. 10-15 Device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a), the jackpot game state ends while being sandwiched, etc.), the first round game when controlled again to the advantageous state in the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state, and when the sandwiched game medium wins in the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next big hit occurs, the game ball enters the big winning slot at the start of the 1st round, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the winning number is displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state , it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, during the period from the closed state to the open state of the big winning port, a fanfare effect suggesting that a big win game state has been executed) possible, etc.), along with the start of display of the given amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute a round game display capable of specifying the round game being executed and an effect during the round corresponding to the round game. (For example, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, the number of wins is displayed together with the number of rounds, and it is possible to execute an effect during the big win corresponding to the round game).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the game interest.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
Characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. When,
Control means (for example, CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.), and the display means can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given by winning the game medium to the variable winning means (for example, a winning number display, etc.), when the first round game among the round games is performed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state The awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time. If not, after the predetermined period of time has passed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the acquired number), and the predetermined period of time is reached. If the game medium wins in the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings). , a light emitting means (for example, the production effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, the light emission control means, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the game medium When the variable winning means is won, and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the light emitting means is controlled with a light emission pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium ( For example, when a game ball wins in a big winning hole, the attacker lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, when a prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and also to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, even if the prize is won within the predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may be a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) positioned near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. etc.), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the performance effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c). , The number of times of light emission per unit time is larger than the light emission of the predetermined light emission means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), and the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the production during the jackpot The number of times of light emission of the effect lamp 9 per unit time is greater than the number of light emission (a form for notifying that the player has won a prize).

According to this configuration, it is easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is activated when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. A winning sound corresponding to winning is output, and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning A sound may be output (for example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, a winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
Characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 044AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), a round game display that can identify the round game being executed can be displayed (for example, the number of rounds is displayed), and the first round of the multiple round games When a game is played, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, the awarded amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are performed. is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the second and subsequent rounds of the multiple round games are displayed. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second round game or later is displayed after the predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened.) If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, After the lapse of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions), and the game medium is changed within the predetermined period. When the winning means wins, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, when a prize is won within a predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. , it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is played for the second time or later. If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the above period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the round game after the second round is performed, If the game medium does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the big winning slot is opened, as shown in FIG. within a predetermined period after the variable prize-winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is performed for the second time or later. When the game medium wins the variable winning means on the first day, the given amount according to the game value given corresponding to the winning is added from the given amount display displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium wins the big prize slot within a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the winning number display displayed in the previous round game , the number of winning balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means can update and display the display of the award amount being displayed in response to winning of game media in the variable winning means. The update display of the awarded amount display is finished until the variable winning means once changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (for example, the big winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning may be completed within a period from the closing to the opening state corresponding to the 2nd R).

According to this configuration, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win. .

(Description of Means Related to Characteristic Portion 045AK) The characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 045AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and When the game medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, wherein the light emission control means is the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount before the lapse of the predetermined period is better is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18) Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning slot, the winning number is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. In this situation, for example, as shown in FIGS. The effect lamps 9 are alternately lit, and more effect lamps 9 emit light than during a predetermined period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and display the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time. It is possible to liven up the production after the is performed and improve the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed. It is possible (for example, to perform a right-handed display), and the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the performance effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, the When the application amount display is not displayed, the predetermined light emission means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display while the specific light emission means is caused to emit light, and the application amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. When there is, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, until a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, see FIG. 10-7 (c-3 ) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the production effect lamp 9 is sequentially lit to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and the big winning opening is opened. In the case where the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit later to suggest a right-hand shot, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is left lit without being extinguished as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). etc.).

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, in the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one round game ends and the next round game starts. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes an upper limit period in which a large winning opening can be opened.) After the predetermined period has passed, the time until the variable winning means is in the second state is It is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count after the predetermined period has passed for 10 game balls to win). period, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, in the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media are won, and the next round game starts (for example, 10 (e.g., the upper limit period for opening the big winning hole by winning a game ball), the time from the elapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is the game medium It is sufficient time for a specific number of prizes to be won (for example, the upper limit period for opening the large winning opening is sufficient even if counting from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the display of the awarded amount before the lapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, and the award after the lapse of the predetermined period After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is caused to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period of time elapses, that is, until the winning number is displayed). As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not illuminated, and as shown in FIGS. (e.g., the effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light).

According to this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, the advantageous state is controlled until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and the round game being executed can be specified along with the start of display of the given amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a round production corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, display the number of rounds, display the number of acquisitions, and perform a jackpot production after a predetermined period of time), and the execution timing of the production during the round is the same. Lighting the light emitting means at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the big hit, etc.) , may be

According to this configuration, at the timing when the mid-round production is executed, the production can be livened up at once, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning port 10) capable of winning game media, wherein the display means It is possible to display the awarded amount of game value imparted due to the game medium winning the general winning means as the imparted amount display (for example, display of the number of winnings corresponding to the winning of the general winning slot 10). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the grant amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, a predetermined display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded, such as "0000", is displayed, etc.). When the general prize winning means is won, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize means is displayed as the amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened) When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 10, after the predetermined period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10). good too.

According to this configuration, since the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is also performed for the winning of the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area). provided, etc.), the display means can display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win) at the same timing as the display of the award amount, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state An effect is displayed at the same timing as the grant amount display (for example, an effect display that activates a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win is performed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, effect display , the decorative patterns that constitute the big hit are moved in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and displayed in a manner suggesting a right hit).

According to this configuration, the game area to be shot is suggested by the effect display, and the player can easily recognize the game area to be shot.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls given in the big win game state and the notification that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached a predetermined number. Acquisition number notification display and display are possible. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the number of wins is such that the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. As for the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to First Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing a background art related to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the jackpot game state, it may display the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the display of the acquired number of "points 120" is displayed corresponding to the fact that the number of acquired balls is 120. In the example shown in FIG.

For display of the winning number, numbers for displaying the number of winning balls and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the display of the winning number are used. The numerals used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The winning number display shown in FIG. 11-1(A) has the characters "points" for recognizing that it is the winning number display and the number "120" for displaying the number of prize balls. used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by the lines forming the character, and is an area not connected to the area outside the lines forming the character. Here, "not leading to the area outside the line forming the character" means that the "specific area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the line forming the character" by the "line forming the character". and the case where the "specific area" is not completely separated from the "area outside the lines forming the characters" by the "lines forming the characters" but appears to be a different area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed will be referred to as a "specific character".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific area is a substantially circular area surrounded by curves forming the characters. The Arabic numeral "8" is formed with two specific areas. For the Arabic numeral "4", the triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines forming the character is the specific area.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed during a big win. The background image during the big win is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the big win game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device. If the background image during the big win changes over time, the line of the background image during the big win may overlap behind the display of the number of wins. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the display of the number of acquisitions, the big hit is behind the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). If the lines of the middle background image overlap, the line of the middle background image of the big win may be assimilated with the line forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 11-1(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) and (B), the line of the background image "Butterfly" during the big win is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, The line of 'butterfly' in the background image during the big win is assimilated with the line forming the specific character '0', and the specific character '0' looks like the Arabic numeral '8' instead of the Arabic numeral '0'.

In this way, if the characters of the winning number display are misidentified as characters different from the original characters, it is impossible to accurately recognize the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the background image during the big win so that the line of the background image during the big win does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background. A first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the acquired number in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the acquired number is , are displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the color of the line 20SHS1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the acquired number is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", and "6" , “8”, and “9” are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character, and the character is displayed to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the line 20SHS1 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of wins, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of winning balls, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making it recognizable as the number of wins are also shown in Figure 11- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode that is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display for notifying that the number of awarded balls reaches a predetermined number in a big win game state. - 特許庁

Here, the time saving control and the variable probability control that are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times, or before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. However, for example, the number of times of time saving control and variable probability control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high that is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state The definite control and the time saving control may be continuously executed until a big win occurs again after the big win game state is ended. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state of plural times in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the obtained number notification display for notifying that fact is displayed. do.

When the number of winning balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the winning number notification display, a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than the number for recognizing that the winning number notification display is displayed. and are used. The numerals used for the acquisition number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, there are characters corresponding to the specific characters. In the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific area of the specific characters used for display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(B), among the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are specified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the winning number notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the predetermined number, or the winning number notification display. Specific characters among characters other than numerals for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 11-2(B).

(Appearance of acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the obtained number display looks in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) and (B), the line of the background image "cho" is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the winning number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the big win is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can recognize.

On the image display device 5, in addition to the winning number display 20SHK, a big win display 20SHO for recognizing that it is controlled to the big win game state, and a big win combination derived and displayed when it is controlled to the big win game state. A decoration symbol display 20SHZ indicating a fixed decoration symbol, a round number display 20SHR indicating the round number of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM suggesting that the player should hit to the right are displayed. It is The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also placed in the end regions that do not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device 5, similarly to the winning number display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display, and the winning number display 20SHK and winning. A character different from the character used for number notification display may be included. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4, "numbers" and "katakana" are used for the characters of the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display. Also, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display. In the round number display 20SHR, the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are the same type of characters as "numbers", and the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are different. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. The right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 for the winning number display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an effect operation example of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is a first display area 20SH51 and an area surrounding the first display area 20SH51. Various displays are performed by distinguishing the second display area 20SH52 narrower than 20SH51. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image during the big win in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 . In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a big win display, a decoration symbol display, a round number display, and a right-handed display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big winning hole. In FIG. 11-4(A), since the acquisition number display 20SHK with "point 990" is displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The effect control CPU 120 updates the number of the winning number display 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the big winning hole and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. It counts up by one until "1005". In that case, the number of 20 SHK obtained is passed through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a rounded number of "1000".
In other words, the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the big win game state reaches "1000", and the number of prize balls in the big win game state is "2000". , the number-of-acquisitions notification display of ``Over 2000'' is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 notifies the acquired number at the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes Kiriban's "1000" A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(G), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each frame of the image while the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "1005", the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-4(G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame-in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH started to be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(H), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move to the left edge of the area.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started by displaying a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing. Display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 considers that the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been started by stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and for a predetermined period from that timing. display control may be performed to end the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH when .

As described above, the specific area of the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(H), the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to (H), the background image during the big win can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH.

Also, the characters used for the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number of acquisitions display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(D) to (H).

It should be noted that the effect mode when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode of frame-in the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, stopping and then out of the frame. For example, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame-in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be projected from the back side of the screen to the front side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually emerge. Alternatively, a character may appear and the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech balloon showing the character's lines. In addition, instead of rendering the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH out of the frame, it is possible to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side of the screen, or to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH disappear gradually. Alternatively, when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a balloon indicating the character's lines, the character may leave.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 .
The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions that informs that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of awarded balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display of "over 2000". The win number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period of time has passed since the display started.
The characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK. Characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display 20SHKH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. To make the background video during a big win invisible from a specific region of the specific characters, when the background video during the big win is visible from the specific region of the characters, the specific characters may look different from the original characters. Therefore, the specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, unlike the winning number display 20SHKH, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the big win game state, but is started when the number of prize balls provided in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed for a limited period of time to congratulate the winner, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. By doing so, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the big win in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Also, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals '0', '4', '6', '8' and '9'.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image during the big win.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the winning number display 20SHK allows the player to accurately grasp the number of winning balls in the big win game state.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is easily visible to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display 20SHKH, and the winning number display 20SHK and Characters different from those used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are included, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used for the big win display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately recognize specific characters in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is frame-in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH, the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger than the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK for the area of the lines forming the characters. Portion size proportions small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters for the acquisition number notification display. Here, a three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to protrude from the front side. The area of lines forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during the big win, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used to display the number of wins and the three-dimensional characters used to display the number of wins.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the three-dimensional characters used for notifying the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters and the size of the line area forming the three-dimensional characters The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same as that of the area 20SHS21. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the region of lines forming the character includes the region 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the region 20SHS21 expressing the character and the The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character is the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located inside the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters, rather than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, ``0'', ``4'', ``6'', ``8'', and ``9'' correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the background video during the big win, the background video during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in modification 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used for display of the number of wins and the 3D characters used for display of the number of wins in the modified example 1. FIG.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-stereoscopic characters and the size of the area 20SHI1 forming the 3D characters. The size of the area 20SH31 representing the character in the area of the lines is the same size. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SH31 expressing the character and the character on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 express the character. The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 representing the depth of the image is the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character located on the inner peripheral side of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are displayed in three-color gradation in the area of the lines forming the characters. The combination is displayed in one of display modes A to G, which are different from each other.

The area of the line forming the character of the display mode A is colored with three color gradations: "red" for the upper area 20SHSU, "orange" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode B are colored with three gradation colors: "orange" for the upper area 20SHSU, "yellow" for the central area 20SHSC, and "green" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode C is colored with three gradations of "yellow" for the upper area 20SHSU, "green" for the central area 20SHSC, and "light blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode D are colored with three gradation colors: "green" for the upper area 20SHSU, "light blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode E is colored with three color gradations: "light blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "purple" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters of the display mode F are colored with three gradation colors: "blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "purple" for the central area 20SHSC, and "red" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode G is colored with three color gradations: "purple" for the upper area 20SHSU, "red" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the mode of the characters used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode A→ . . , and displayed while changing with time.

FIG. 11-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a change in color accompanying the operation of displaying the number of acquisitions in the modified example 2. FIG.

In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B), when the obtained number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the obtained number notification display is moved (frame-in/out). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition count notification display changes differs between when the frame is out).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquired number notification display takes 0.35 seconds to move (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51. , from the display mode A to the display mode D in order. After that, the acquired number display changes from display mode D to display mode G in order while it is stopped for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and displayed. After that, the acquisition number notification display is moved (framed out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds, while the display modes G to C are sequentially displayed. Change.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 .
The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions that informs that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display "over 2000". The winning number display is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time elapses after the display is started. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions are larger in size than the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for displaying the number of wins. Further, the specific characters used for the display of the number of acquired characters have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the display of the acquired number.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the specific characters are displayed. If the background video during the big win is visible from the specific area, the specific characters may look different from the original characters. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Also, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters. The area of the lines that form the three-dimensional character includes an area that expresses the character and an area that expresses the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the acquisition number notification display.

In addition, as described above, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in order to congratulate the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, even if the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, the risk of misrecognizing the character can be suppressed. By making the background image visible during the big hit from 20SHI3, the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the specific character used for displaying the number of wins in the modified example 1, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible not only to suppress discomfort even if the background image during the big win is not visible from the specific area of the specific character, but also to prevent the background image during the big win from being visible from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to prevent misidentification of characters.

Further, as described above, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display in Modification 2 are displayed in three-color gradation in the area of the lines forming the characters. Then, the image display device 5 sets the mode of the characters used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode. The display is changed over time in the order of A → . . . When the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out), the acquisition number notification display is changed. The speed at which the display mode changes differs.

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the acquisition number notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Description of Third Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the result display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used for result display)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the round game of the final round is finished, the pachinko game machine 1 executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a result display that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state while displaying the ending background image.

For the result display, numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the result display are used. The numbers used for result display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the result display, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific area of the specific character used for result display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific area 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for the result display is transparent. is displayed in the display mode.

Of the characters used for the result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing the result display are also shown in FIG. A specific area is displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals indicated by -8.

(Various productions in the jackpot game state)
FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect period of various effects in the jackpot game state. FIGS. 11-10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of various effects in the jackpot game state.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a reservation-in-reservation advance notice suggesting control to the jackpot game state corresponding to the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot game state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state of all 10 rounds, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIGS. At timing T1 at which a round game of 10 rounds, which is a round, is started, the reservation notice is started.

When the reservation notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B). In front of the background image during the big hit, the effect image of the reservation notice is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the reservation notice.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image "flame" line is superimposed on the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK, Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. Therefore, the line of the "flame" of the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0" in the specific area, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (B) to (C), when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending effect is started at timing T2, the effect control CPU 120 End the Renso notice and start the ending production. When the ending effect starts, in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the ending background image starts to be displayed with a predetermined brightness. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image of falling cherry blossoms falling from the back of the screen is displayed. In addition, in front of the ending background image, characters of "jackpot end" are displayed corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 ends the on-hold advance notice before the display of the ending background image starts at the timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background image is being displayed, the effect image 20SHE of the pending advance notice is not displayed. In other words, the effect image 20SHE of the reservation preview is displayed when the ending background image is not displayed.

The ending background image may be an image displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 11D. There may be In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the falling cherry blossoms displayed as the ending background image are dancing over the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at the timing T3 when the result display is started, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to be higher than the predetermined brightness. Reduces the brightness to a specific dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image with brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(E), the falling cherry blossoms have stopped, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-10(A), (B), and (E). Also, the result display 20SHRE may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 11-10(E). It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting by ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of a setting suggesting effect using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is configured to be able to display the above-described ending background image as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossoms are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of falling cherry blossoms are falling from the left and right cherry trees in full bloom, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not necessarily suggest whether the setting value is low or high. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate. In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the ending background image may have different presentation modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the setting value is not "6". Also, the ending background image may have a different rendering mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned Renso announcement on hold is one of a plurality of types of announcement effects for heralding the degree of reliability of a big hit, but the setting suggesting effect by the Renso announcement on hold is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 .
The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to progress of the round game in the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Further, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the big win game state in response to the hold information stored on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a reservation advance notice suggesting that it will be held. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 to notify the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK. The characters used in the winning number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHRE for notifying the reservation are not visible from the specific area. On the other hand, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation. can be preferably displayed in relation to the ending background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. Since it may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the Sho notice, if the background image during the big hit or the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will look different from the original character. However, by making the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation inside the reservation invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since it does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice, the ending background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it is possible to show the ending background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a manner suggesting the set value. The effect image 20SHRE of the pending notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for predicting the degree of reliability of the big win, but the setting suggesting effect by the pending notice is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggesting effect by the ending background image is executed, it is significant that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific character used for the result display 20SHRE. increase.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background image with a predetermined brightness. Then, at the timing T3 when the result display 20SHRE is started to be displayed, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and also displays the ending background video with a brightness brighter than the specific brightness. Display the result display 20SHRE.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Description of Fourth Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the remaining number of times display relating to the remaining number of times of the ST number in the variable probability state, and when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is notified. and the remaining number of times notification display can be displayed. The characters used for the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the remaining number of times is such that the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. The background image in the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the display of the number of remaining times.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
11-12 are diagrams showing background art related to the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH.

In a pachinko machine, basically, when comparing a state that is advantageous to the player, such as a variable probability state, a time-saving state, and a jackpot game state, and a normal state, the game is played in the normal state rather than the period in which the game is played in the advantageous state. is designed to be longer.

For example, in a pachinko machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of pending information is stored, when the upper limit number of pending information is not stored. A shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed. And, in the probability variable state with the time reduction control, since the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, winning is more likely than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to progress the game. Therefore, the period during which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period during which the game is played in the variable probability state accompanied by the time saving control.

In the variable probability control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either the condition of when the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed or when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is established first. end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" while the variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control ends when the special figure game of the predetermined number of STs is consumed. . Note that the predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbols in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the end of the jackpot game state, one of the following conditions is established first: that the special game is executed for a predetermined number of time-saving times, or that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit". end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time saving control is performed, the time saving control ends when the special game of the predetermined number of time saving times is completed. . In addition, the predetermined number of times of time saving is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, it is good also as a value different from the setting value of the number of times of ST, and the setting value of the number of times of time saving.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), there is a case where the remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the remaining number display of "30 remaining times" is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of ST times being 30 times.

For the display of the remaining number of times, a number for displaying the remaining number of STs and characters other than the number for recognizing the display of the remaining number of times are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The remaining number display shown in FIG. 11-12(A) includes the characters "remaining" and "times" for recognizing that it is the remaining number display, and "30" for displaying the remaining number of STs. and numbers are used.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number of times, there is a specific character in which a specific area is formed.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the background image during ST is displayed in such a manner that the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the variable probability state. The background image in the ST includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the remaining number of times is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not impede the visibility of the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device. If the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap behind the display of the remaining number of times. Then, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining count display, ST is displayed on the back of the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). When the lines of the medium image overlap, the lines of the background image in the ST may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 11-12(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), the line of the background image during the ST is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of remaining times, and the background image during the ST merges with the line forming the specific character "0" so that the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the remaining number display is mistakenly recognized as a character different from the original character, the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background, and the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Remaining count display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 11-13 are diagrams showing examples of display modes of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times is , is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-13, the color of the line 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of remaining times is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of 8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the background image during the ST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the pun, and the characters are displayed to the extent that the specific area 20SHI6 and the line 20SHS6 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 that forms the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the remaining number of STs, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making the remaining number of times displayed are shown in the figure. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 11-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 11-14 are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

When the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a remaining number notification display for notifying the predetermined number.

When the number of remaining times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the remaining number of times notification display includes a number for displaying the predetermined number of times, and characters other than the number for making the remaining number of times notification display recognizable. and are used. The numerals used for the remaining number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the display of the number of remaining times is displayed in a plurality of modes with different transmittances. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen through the line area.

In addition, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In the display mode in which the character background is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode in which the background of the character is visible, the area 20SHS71 for expressing the character is transparently displayed. This area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-14, specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image can be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI7.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display differs depending on whether the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transmissive manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the remaining count notification display is displayed in an opaque manner, and since the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the characters, the area expressing the characters A specific area 20SHI7 is an area surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of 20SHS71 and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the character located on the inner circumference side. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining count notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and since the area 20SHS71 representing characters is displayed transparently, the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character is expressed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B is the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of Remaining Count Display in Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining count display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-15(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-15 (A) and (B), the line of the background image during the ST overlaps behind the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining number display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, the specific region 20SHI6 is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the background image in the ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining count display 20SHST, the image display device 5 displays a winning count display 20SHK, a right-handed display 20SHM, and a variable probability display 20SHRU for recognizing that the variable probability state is controlled. there is Acquisition number display 20SHK, right-handed display 20SHM, probability variation display 20SHRU are also displayed small in the end area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to impede the visibility of the decoration pattern, like the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may contain different types of characters than the characters that can be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, "numbers", "hiragana" and "kanji" are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. On the other hand, the variable probability display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of characters from the characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquisition number display 20SHK includes "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, katakana, is used. In addition, the right-handed display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH, and the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right-hand hitting display 20SHM, and the odd probability display 20SHRU, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right hitting display 20SHM, and the odds display 20SHRU are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI6 for the remaining number display 20SHST, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of effect operation of remaining count display and remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 11-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the variable display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display. FIGS. 11-17 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of STs of the remaining number display 20 SHST each time the variable display is executed. to display.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times is started to be displayed in a non-transmissive display mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of times when the variable display of 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, and 10 times indicated by the remaining number display is started. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is started in a non-transmissive display mode. As shown in FIGS. 11-17B to 11-17D, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-17, when the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is a display where the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has passed since the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH has started, the effect control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transmissive display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed since the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is changed, the effect control CPU 120 The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is terminated.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches the predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of STs may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not transparent so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in one variable display. The total period including the second period of display in the transmissive display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variable display is executed based on the variation pattern, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended in the one variable display.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described above. On the other hand, the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transmissive remaining time information display 20SHSTH is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to allow the user to recognize the display result of the variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transmissive display mode is a variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. is set to end before the timing at which the display result in the variable display is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variable display is executed based on the variation pattern, The display result of the variable display can be favorably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived. Because of the change, the identification information behind the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the lines forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the remaining number of times is displayed. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the ST background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state on the front side of the ST background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times displayed on the front side of the ST background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, there is a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and "When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50" 50” can be displayed. The remaining number display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is performed. On the other hand, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include specific areas surrounded by lines forming the characters. As for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the background video during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the ST background image. For example, when the player confirms the remaining ST number in the variable probability state, the remaining number display 20SHST is confirmed, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, If the background image in the ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, the specific character can be accurately recognized. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST. It is displayed only for a period of time, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

In addition, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized when the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player. .

Further, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the obtained number display 20SHK from deteriorating due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. Displayable (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image during the big win corresponding to the big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the area, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background video during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (20 SHK, etc., can be displayed on the front side), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, the amount of game value provided is a predetermined amount. As a notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached the first predetermined amount, and a first notification display that indicates that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 displays at least in the first display area 20SH51 the number of prize balls given in the big win game state on the front side of the background image during the big win. Acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, and when the number of awarded balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display "1000 over" is displayed. display is possible, and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 2000", etc.); It is updated each time a game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed when game balls are paid as prize balls in the jackpot game state). updated each time it is displayed, etc.), and the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH such as ending the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed), and the characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the amount to be given (for example, used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions 20SHK are larger in size than the characters used for the display, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the notification display have a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters including specific characters formed (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.); The specific characters used to display the award amount are such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during the big hit cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. etc.), the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is such that the background image during the big win is visible from the specific area. possible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is intended to congratulate the player when the amount of game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period, and since it is displayed with large size characters in the wide first display area, the background image is made visible from the specific area of the specific characters, which is called the first display area. It is possible to show the background image even a little at a conspicuous display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters are Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6", "8", "9", etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, the image display device 5 displays the obtained number It is also possible to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while the display 20SHK is being displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the information display is displayed, it is possible to accurately grasp the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state by the display of the amount of giving.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means can display the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the notification display becomes more noticeable to the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of game value awarded in an advantageous state has reached the predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means can display a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area ( For example, the image display device 5 can display the big win display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. , the characters used for the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display, and characters different from the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display. , Any type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right-handed display 20SHM) The characters used include the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters different from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. The type of character also includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed, etc.), the specific character used for the specific display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from a specific area, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the specific character can be accurately recognized even for the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, it can be controlled in a jackpot game state), and display means (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51 that is the first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than ), and the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display a background video during a big win corresponding to a big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the background video in the second display region (For example, the image display device 5 can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given on the front side of the given game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the given amount on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of winning balls can be displayed), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification that the amount of game value provided has reached a predetermined amount. As displays, there are a first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state in front of the background image during the jackpot in at least the first display area 20SH51. When the number of awarded balls reaches ``1000'' in the jackpot game state, the win count notice display of ``over 1000'' can be displayed as the win count notification display for notifying that the player has won the jackpot game state. When the number of awarded balls reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display such as "over 2000"). (For example, the winning number display is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.). display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the display of the number of acquisitions is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started), and the notification display is larger than the characters used to display the awarded amount (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions). etc.), the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, (e.g., a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character). Yes (for example, the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is such that the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific character used for the display of the awarded amount. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than that of The ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the region of the line forming the is small, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area representing a character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display). , the background video during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the amount of the game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the meaning of congratulating a person, is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the characters is small, it is possible to reduce the risk of misidentifying the characters even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character. can increase

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific character used in the above may be such that the background image during the big hit cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible to suppress discomfort even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific character. can be prevented from being misidentified.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means can change the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number The notification display 20SHKH can be stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period has passed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line regions forming the characters (for example, the modification of the characteristic portion 20SH in the second mode). 2, the line area forming the characters is displayed in three-color gradation, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of types of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character modes used for the acquisition number notification display in the following manner: display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → . The speed at which the combination of the plurality of types of colors changes differs depending on whether the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 or when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped. The speed at which the acquisition number notification display changes may differ depending on whether the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state that allows the game to progress faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to control to a variable probability state with time saving control that can progress the game faster than the normal state, etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means , the background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 , the background image can be displayed during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, in front of the background image, it is possible to display the number of fluctuations display regarding the number of fluctuations in the special state (for example, an image display device 5, in the second display area 20SH52, on the front side of the background image during ST, the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST number in the probability changing state can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, In front of the background image, as a frequency notification display for notifying the number of times of change when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a predetermined value, the number of times of change is notified when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of times of change when the value of the change number of times display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 may display at least the first In the 1 display area 20SH51, when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the ST background image, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed by the remaining number of times display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times. A remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times displayed by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50. , etc.), the display of the number of times of change is updated each time the variable display is executed. (For example, the remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is executed, etc.), and the number of times notification display ends when a specific period elapses after starting the display ( For example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has passed since the display started), and the characters used for the number of times notification display are more than the characters used for the variation number display. Large size characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH should be larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST), and the number of fluctuations display and the number of times notification display The characters used include specific characters forming a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are surrounded by lines forming the characters). The specific character used for the display of the number of fluctuations is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific region (for example, the specific character used for the remaining number display 20 SHST is the specific region 20SHI6 to ST background video cannot be visually recognized, etc.), and the specific character used for the number of times notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area The specific characters are characterized in that the background image in the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the change count display and the count notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of fluctuations in the special state, the number of fluctuations is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. If the background image is visible, the specific characters may look different from the original characters, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters are accurately recognized. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not always displayed like the variable number display, but is limited to a specific period in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number indicated by the variable number display reaches a predetermined number. Since it is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It is possible to show the background image even a little.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used for the number-of-times notification display in a transmissive mode in which an image on the back side can be seen through an area of lines forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized while the count notification display is being displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 is "left", "middle", including the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the identification information while displaying the number-of-games notification display, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 can (When the display result of the display is derived and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the number-of-times notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value that has been given (for example, the image display device 5 , can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls, etc.), and display the number of times notification display (for example, image display The device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from deteriorating due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means indicates that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the first background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. background video can be displayed during a big hit, etc.), and at least in the first display area, a second background video corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least In the first display area 20SH51, the ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state can be displayed, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that suggests the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display , on the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the pending game, which suggests that it will be controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the stored pending information, etc.); In the second display area, it is possible to display, in front of the first background image, a given amount display regarding the given amount of game value given (for example, the image display device 5 can display the following in the second display area 20SH52 In the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls, etc.), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, Notification of the amount of game value given in the advantageous state on the front side of the second background image (For example, when the ending background image is being displayed, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. The result display 20 SHRE that informs the total number of awarded balls can be displayed, etc.), and the characters used for the result notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the awarded amount display (for example, The characters used for the result display 20SHRE should be larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.). Contains specific characters that form a specific area surrounded (for example, the characters used in the win number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters) etc.), the specific character used for the display of the amount to be given is such that the first background image and the specific suggestive image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20 SHK is the specific area The background image during the big hit and the effect image 20 SHRE of the notice of the reservation inside Renso are not visible from the background image, etc.), and the specific characters used for the result notification display are the second background image that is visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the application amount display including the specific characters in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestive image, and display the result notification including the specific characters in conjunction with the second background image. It can be conveniently displayed in relation. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. Since it may overlap with the suggestive video, if the first background video or the specific suggestive video is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. By making it impossible to visually recognize the background image and the specific suggestive image during the big win from the specific area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestive video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It is possible to show the second background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" can be set), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is It is one aspect of a plurality of types of suggestive images that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect image 20 SHRE of the pending notice is a predictor of the reliability of the big hit. Although it is one of a plurality of types of advance notice effects, the setting suggesting effect due to the pending advance notice is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so it is significant that the second background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result notification display. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image with a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image with a predetermined brightness). at the timing of starting the display of the result notification display, the second background image is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the specific brightness is displayed. Display the result notification display with a brightness brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 temporarily suspends the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started. and displaying the result display 20 SHRE with brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 19SH)
Next, a game machine related to the characteristic portion 19SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH displays the winning number of the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the big winning opening in the big win game state, and is scheduled to be given in the big win game state. and a display of the number of expected winning balls related to the total number of prize balls. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of winnings invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the display of the expected winning number becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Production action when a prize is won during a round game)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls given by entering the , and a scheduled winning number display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by a central bracket line "/", such as "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator. 20SHK2 is arranged and is displayed in a fractional format, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator. 12-1(A), the winning number display 20SHK indicates that 135 balls are given as the game balls enter the big winning opening in the big win game state, and are given in the big win game state. This indicates that the total number of prize balls to be played is 1500.

Also in this embodiment, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In the second display area 20SH52, the big win display 20SHO, the decoration pattern display 20SHZ, and the round number display 20SHR are displayed. , a right-handed display 20SHM is also displayed. In addition, on the image display device 5, a background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed corresponding to the progress of the round game in the big win game state. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the background image during the big win is displayed on the display layer arranged behind the display layer on which the win number display 20SHK is displayed.

When the game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and the prize ball is given, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the effect mode as shown in FIGS. Update the value of 20SHK.

When a game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and a prize ball is awarded, the effect control CPU 120 first, as shown in FIG. In the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7, the display of the effect display is started. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(D), the effect display 20SHEF is moved to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, so that the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-1(D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when game balls enter the big winning hole, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1(D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2(D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(F), the display of the number of acquisitions 20SHK becomes visible after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When it becomes , it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1, which has been focused on, has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over winning occurs)
FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when over winning occurs. FIG. 12-4 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that the big winning hole is closed when the tenth game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game. A so-called over winning may occur in which the 1st game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the win number display 20SHK according to the effect mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When over winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a large winning opening, as shown in FIGS. Effect display is started in a display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(B), a tornado-like effect display 20SHEF is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 . At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Before it becomes invisible or difficult, an over-winning presentation is started for notifying that an over-winning has occurred. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the image display device 5 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by another effect device as an over winning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs, as an over-win effect, an over-win sound different from the normal win-win sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over-winning sound of "picon picon" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the normal winning sound as an over winning effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated as shown in FIG. 12-4(D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(D), by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-3(D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible after the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. can be confirmed.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably recognize that the values of the obtained number display 20SHK1 and the expected number of obtained display 20SHK2, which have been focused on, have been updated.

In particular, when over winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated, so that the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state is given due to the over winning. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the number of winning balls has been increased by the number of winning balls.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect as shown in FIG. 12-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(G), the display of the over-win effect image displayed on the image display device 5 as the over-win effect is ended, and the background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting by over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball output rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the set value, and is configured to be able to execute the above-described over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "People!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect by the over winning effect may not definitely suggest whether the set value is low or high. For example, when the set value is set to a low value, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the set value is set to a high value In addition, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the over-winning effect may differ in the effect mode depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Also, the over-winning effect may be different in effect mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or when the set value is an even number.

(If there are rounds where the predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds where over-winnings occurred)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and rounds in which over-winning has occurred in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As described above, the open state of the jackpot game state is continued until the timing when the predetermined period elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches the predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A) to (B), in one round of the round game, although there were 9 prizes, before the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reached 10 After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round of the round game, the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-6(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, an ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 becomes a value smaller than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2. , and the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to understand that there were rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won, and there were rounds in which over winnings occurred.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing another example of the effect operation when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes are not won and rounds in which over prizes are won in the characteristic portion 19SH.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12-7 (A) to (B), in the round game of one round, although there were 9 winnings, before the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reached 10 After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round of the round game, the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-7(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK1 value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains "1500".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-7(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of the round game are executed is 1500, but over winning occurs in the 3 rounds of the round game. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the value of the final winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to such an embodiment, when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 do not cause discomfort. be able to.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 which can be changed between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or cannot win a prize. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when being controlled to the jackpot game state. . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win effect when an over-win occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 displays the winning number display 20SHK1 related to the number of winning balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and the winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state. A planned number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 is updated, a sense of incongruity is caused more than when the value of the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 is updated while the number of expected acquisition display 20SHK2 is visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L and 8R. The effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the image display device 5 and the effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over winning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the special variable prize winning device 7 can be represented by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 but also the number of acquisition display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see.

Further, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect indicator 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 before the value is updated due to the attention on the effect display 20SHEF.

Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that an over-winning has occurred by executing the over-winning effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over winning effect.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect after the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 can be visually recognized while the over winning effect continues, a sense of discomfort caused by the updating of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of an error detection code and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, by executing such power supply stop processing, the CPU 103 can resume the game before the power failure after the power failure is restored. can continue.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 cannot continue the effect based on the game information before the power failure after the power failure is restored.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure during the round game, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquired number display 20SHK2 in the round game after the restoration of power supply, or displays a specific number such as "????/????" The acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a prize is won in the round game after power failure is restored, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the over winning effect by the image display device 5 if it can be specified that an over winning effect has occurred in one round of the round game after the restoration of power supply, and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to execute an over winning effect by the attack lamp 9c. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by means of a effect control command that notifies that an over-win has occurred.

According to such a configuration, in a situation in which the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, if over-winning occurs, it is possible to notify that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and the display Means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5, etc.), a variable that can be changed between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win Winning means (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or are difficult to win), Control means (for example, pachinko) capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when being controlled to the advantageous state; The game machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when being controlled to the jackpot game state.) a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media wins the variable prize winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can , including a production control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the display means is provided when the game medium wins the variable winning means It is possible to display (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and a planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when game media greater than the predetermined number win the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the second awarded amount display is visible by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the value of the second application amount display is updated (for example, the image display device 5 updates the effect table (e.g. updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the display 20SHEF), Start the specific effect before it becomes invisible or difficult (the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) , characterized in that

According to such a configuration, when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated, a sense of discomfort is caused more than when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated while the display of the second application amount is visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The game machine of (1) above includes audio output means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R), and the specific effect execution means uses the specific effect as the specific effect. An effect by the display means and an effect by the audio output means can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect. executable, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the specific production.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the game medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area near the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 is configured so that the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7). Then, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be represented by the display effect on the display means, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the specific display makes not only the display of the second application amount but also the display of the first application amount invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have the effect display 20SHEF moved. is visible at times, and becomes invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display are naturally visible. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the first application amount display and the second application amount display in the state before the value is updated due to attention to the specific display.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect executing means may perform the above-described Start a specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts an over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that the game media greater than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means by executing the specific effect, so that the display of the second award amount is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when the device is used.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, setting means (for example, pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the setting The specific effect can be executed in a manner suggesting the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 can execute an over winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific effect.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect executing means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display of the effect display 20SHEF is (e.g., ending the over-winning effect after finishing).

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the display of the second applied amount can be visually recognized while the specific effect is continuing, the sense of incongruity caused by the update of the display of the second applied amount can be eliminated. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Another example of transition to a time-saving state)
In addition, in each characteristic part and each modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state, the form of transitioning via the big hit state and the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is always operated is exemplified. , the invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving design is derived and displayed as a special design, the state may be shifted to a time-saving state without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 .

In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be used as part of the winning design or may be used as part of the small winning design.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

In addition, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used in combination with other patterns such as a small winning pattern or a winning pattern. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same. However, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be a different probability between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for the time saving pattern, even when using a dedicated random number or using another random number, the timing at the time of winning the starting port good.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, if a dedicated random number is used, the lottery result by the dedicated random number will be the winning value, and if a small-hit design random number is used for the time-saving design lottery, a specific small-hit design The random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery determination value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery determination value can be used as the winning value, and the lottery using the structure, for example, the special variable winning ball A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the fact that the game ball passes through the time-saving area may be regarded as winning of the time-saving design.

When the time-saving pattern lottery is performed using a structure and the small winning pattern is used together with the time-saving pattern, the number of times of variable display of the time-saving state is not changed depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed.

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be the winning value. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be the timing after the big hit determination. Incidentally, the lottery for the time-saving symbol is not executed in the time-saving state or the high-probability state, but is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, regardless of which random number value is used for the lottery.
However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, whether the number of times of time-saving is reset or not selected may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Further, when the number of times of time saving is different according to the time saving pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the time saving pattern between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, the derivation lottery of the time saving end pattern may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win pattern is derived and displayed.
In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

In addition, in the case of lottery using a structure, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to the high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit, the high-probability low-base state is in the high-probability low-base state when the amusement center opens, and the high-probability low base state is maintained a specified number of times. After the variable display is executed and finished, control may be performed to the time saving state.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 126SKY)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 126SKY will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-12.
identification information variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in a plurality of variable display areas;
a ready-to-win effect execution means capable of executing a ready-to-win effect when the identification information is in a ready-to-win state;
The variable display area includes at least a first variable display area, a second variable display area, and a third variable display area located between the first variable display area and the second variable display area. configured,
The identification information variable display means
first identification information can be variably displayed in the first variable display area, and second identification information can be variably displayed in the second variable display area;
Third identification information smaller than the first identification information and the second identification information can be variably displayed in the third variable display area,
the first identification information and the second identification information can be variably displayed in a spaced apart state in which the first identification information and the second identification information are separated from the third identification information;
It is possible to stop the variable display in a state in which the first identification information and the second identification information are closer than the predetermined interval to the third identification information,
When the identification information is displayed in the close state from the distant state, a proximity operation is performed to bring the first identification information and the second identification information close to the third identification information,
When the identification information is displayed in the proximity state after the ready-to-win effect is completed, the proximity operation is not performed,
When the first identification information and the second identification information constituting the proximity state include the same effect element, the effect element is displayed in a different display mode,
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
While most of the game is a change of losing, the player will get bored if the game is simply stopped. can.
The loss of the reach means that the performance is performed, and the player can enjoy it with a sense of anticipation. I often get discouraged. In other words, when the player is disappointed after the ready-to-win effect ends, if the decoration pattern described in FIG. , Since it becomes very troublesome, it is set so that the decoration pattern will not be operated again after the end of the ready-to-win effect.

(Description of the second form of the characteristic portion 126SKY)
In the gaming machine of the second mode, at least while the game machine is stopped, the middle symbols are displayed in such a manner that the left decoration symbols and the right decoration symbols are overlapped.
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
The decoration pattern can be made conspicuous even in a narrow liquid crystal.

(Description of the third form of the characteristic portion 126SKY)
In the game machine of the third mode, a specific combination (characters) of stopping decoration patterns in a close state when they are lost or an action of combination (such as two people making something) gives advance notice or joint performance between the characters. run the
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
It is possible to increase the range of presentation and prevent the player from getting bored.

(Description of the fourth form of the characteristic portion 126SKY)
In the gaming machine of the fourth form, when the hold is accumulated, the shortening variation is applied, and the coalescing time (proximity action time) differs depending on the hold number. For example, it is well known in pachinko machines that shortening variation is performed when 3 or 4 holds are accumulated (loss variation that does not reach reach). , so that the production can be completed even with a short fluctuation time,
It is characterized by
According to this feature,
Even if it is a shortening variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance rather than the performance of stopping without performing the approaching motion.

(Description of fifth form of characteristic portion 126SKY)
In the gaming machine of the fifth mode, as a combination of the losing symbols, it is possible to stop the first appearance similar to the initial appearance to bring about a close state, and to make a combination different from the first appearance. If power is restored while the second roll is stopped, the roll common to the first roll of the close state is stopped. At the time of normal fluctuation stop, it may stop as a fixed 6, 7, 5 as a losing eye. , 5, is displayed. When the power is restored while the numbers that are not fixed numbers such as 1, 2, and 3 are stopped, the decoration patterns of 6 and 5 can be displayed in a close state with the numbers of 6, 7, and 5. have a nature. According to this feature, when the power is restored in the normal state, the background remains normal and the decorative pattern is the initial appearance and is restored in the close state, and when the power is restored in the definite variable state, the background is in the definite variable state and the decorative pattern. Although it is an initial appearance, it is possible to restore the decorative pattern in a state that is not in close proximity.
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
The decoration pattern can be emphasized before the start of variation.

(Description of the sixth form of the characteristic portion 126SKY)
In the gaming machine of the sixth mode, when the player is out after super reach, the screen returns to the normal screen, the 656 decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the close state, and after the big win after super reach, the normal screen is displayed. , and the decoration pattern 666 is stopped and displayed in the close state. However, after the big hit at high base, the decoration pattern is not displayed in the close state,
is characterized by
According to this feature,
The decoration pattern can be emphasized regardless of the time of loss or the time of the big hit.

(Description of the seventh form of the characteristic portion 126SKY)
In the game machine of the seventh embodiment, the pose of the character with the left pattern when the normal reach tenpai is performed (a state in which Yume raises her left hand) is set to pose 1, and the pose of the character with the right figure (a state in which Yume has her right hand). is raised) as pose 2. The decoration pattern develops after reaching, and when the screen returns to the normal screen after losing, the decorative pattern stops close to it in a state of pose 3 (a disappointing display of Yume Yume). Also, when 6 stops to the left or right with a break that does not even reach, stop at pose 4 (a state in which the fist is pointing here), which is different from poses 1, 2, and 3.
It is characterized by
According to this feature,
Since the display mode differs depending on the plurality of decoration patterns, the performance can be enjoyed without getting bored.

(Description of the eighth form of the characteristic portion 126SKY)
In the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit of the reach is set to differ depending on the type of display mode of the decoration pattern.
It is characterized by
According to this feature,
Expectations can be given to each character with a decorative pattern, and even characters with the same decorative pattern can have different display modes (different poses, different weapons, etc.). It is possible to make the degrees different and enhance the player's interest.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 127SKY)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first form of the characterizing part 126SKY will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16.
A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
a ready-to-win effect execution means for executing a ready-to-win effect suggesting control to the advantageous state after the identification information is in the ready-to-win state;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect after the identification information becomes the ready-to-win state and before the ready-to-win effect is executed;
Depending on the type of identification information that is in the reach state, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The ready-to-win performance includes a first ready-to-reach performance that is executed without executing the special performance and a second ready-to-reach performance that is executed after the special performance is executed and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first ready-to-reach performance. Including reach production and
The special effect executing means executes the special effect in a manner in which an image related to the character used in the second ready-to-win effect is displayed so that the displayed identification information is difficult to see,
When the first ready-to-win performance is executed, the identification information in the ready-to-win state is moved to a predetermined position in a first operation mode, and when the second ready-to-win performance is to be executed, the ready-to-win state is entered. moving the identification information to the predetermined position in a second operation mode that is more conspicuous than the first operation mode;
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
When executing a Super Reach using a certain character, after entering the Reach state, by displaying an image related to that character (character introduction animation), it is possible to indicate which character is the content of the Super Reach that will be performed from now on. It is possible to tell the player whether the is active. Furthermore, when an image related to a character is displayed, the character animation can be made more conspicuous by temporarily making the ready-to-reach pattern invisible. In addition, when the pattern in the ready-to-win state is displayed again, the pattern is moved to a predetermined position in a more conspicuous manner than in the normal ready-to-win state. You can enjoy super reach.

(Description of Second Form of Characteristic Portion 127SKY)
In the gaming machine of the second mode, there are a plurality of patterns with different expectations, patterns with low expectations are normal patterns, and patterns with higher expectations than normal patterns are specific patterns. There is a second reach with a higher expectation than one reach, and after the pattern is in a reach state, the operation when moving to a predetermined position is defined as a first operation mode and a second operation mode, and the first operation mode is It moves into position in a normal manner, and said second mode of operation moves into position in a more conspicuous manner than said first mode. In the first reach, regardless of the type of the symbol, it moves to a predetermined position in the first operation mode, and in the second reach, regardless of the normal symbol or the specific symbol, it moves to the predetermined position in the second operation mode. do,
It is characterized by
According to this feature,
The player can be entertained by both the pattern and reach.

(Description of the third form of the characteristic portion 127SKY)
In the gaming machine of the third mode, when the ready-to-win state is reached in the second ready-to-win state than in the first ready-to-win state, the degree of ready-to-reach expectation is higher in the second ready-to-reach state, but the ready-to-reach state is reached with a specific symbol in the first ready-to-reach state. In the case of a state, if the reach state is reached with a normal pattern in the second reach, the first reach will have a higher expectation,
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
Even if the first reach with a lower expectation level than the second reach is selected, the player can have expectations even in the first reach.

(Description of the fourth form of the characteristic portion 127SKY)
In the gaming machine of the fourth mode, there are normal symbols, predetermined symbols, and specific symbols, and the second operation mode has a plurality of modes, and after the second ready-to-reach state is reached, the symbols are moved to a predetermined position. At that time, if it is a normal pattern, it is moved to a predetermined position by normal movement, if it is a predetermined pattern, it is moved to a predetermined position in a conspicuous manner, and if it is a specific pattern, it is conspicuous than the predetermined pattern. to move with
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
The effect of reach production can be enhanced.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 128SKY)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first form of the characterizing part 126SKY will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-16 to 13-20.
a gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state, and suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state;
a detecting means provided in the game machine capable of detecting the action of the player;
an action-promoting effect execution means capable of executing an action-promoting effect for promoting a player's action on the detecting means;
and a display means capable of displaying the effect image,
The action-promoting effect executing means includes:
The motion promoting effect can be executed while the suggestive effect is being executed,
A simulated game machine image simulating the game machine is displayed before the motion detection by the detection means becomes effective, and the player is urged to perform the motion after the motion detection by the detection means becomes effective. The action promotion effect can be executed in a manner in which a promotion image is displayed,
The simulated game machine image includes a simulated display area image that simulates the display means and a simulated detection means image that simulates the detection means,
displaying the suggestion effect being executed in the simulated display area image during execution of the action promoting effect;
While the detection means performs a predetermined action when the action promotion effect is being executed, the simulated detection means image does not perform an action corresponding to the predetermined action,
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
By running the actual machine (simulated game image) and the image (simulated display area) in the actual machine in the liquid crystal in real time in the action promoting performance, more realistic performance can be performed, so that the action can be promoted with realism.

(Description of Second Form of Characteristic Portion 128SKY)
In the gaming machine of the second mode, the holding display and the decoration pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display the simulated gaming machine image on the liquid crystal and at the same time move it to the liquid crystal image in the simulated gaming machine. The feature is that the game machine image is erased before it is displayed.
According to such a feature, it is possible to give a more real-time feeling to the production.

(Description of the third form of the characteristic portion 128SKY)
In the gaming machine of the third mode, the gaming machine frame emits light during execution of the effect, and the simulated gaming machine image frame displayed on the liquid crystal also emits light in the same manner as the gaming machine frame. The action promoting means in the simulated game machine image displayed in 1 does not emit light, but the main body of the game machine emits light.
According to these characteristics,
It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

(Description of the fourth form of the characteristic portion 128SKY)
In the gaming machine of the fourth mode, the image of the simulated gaming machine is displayed before the action detection means becomes effective, and the image of the simulated gaming machine is displayed when the action becomes effective, and the action promotion notification image is displayed. is terminated, the image of the simulated game machine moves while changing the angle, and the button image of the simulated game machine is displayed on the screen so as to be enlarged.
According to these characteristics,
It is possible to emphasize the action promoting effect.

(Description of fifth form of characteristic portion 128SKY)
In the gaming machine of the fifth mode, when the action detecting means of the game machine body vibrates, the action detecting means of the simulated game machine displayed in the liquid crystal does not vibrate.
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
If the simulated game machine image in the liquid crystal is also vibrated, the control of the game machine will become a burden.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 129SKY)
Next, a game machine relating to the first form of the characterizing part 126SKY will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-21 to 13-26.
A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed;
a ready-to-reach effect execution means capable of executing a first ready-to-reach effect and a second ready-to-win effect controlled to be more advantageous than the first ready-to-win effect, and having a high degree of expectation;
The specific display means can display the specific display continuously for a period from when the variable display is performed until the variable display is stopped,
The reach effect execution means is
As the effect results of the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect, a first effect result for notifying that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state and a second effect result for notifying that the control is not to be in the advantageous state. is viewable and
When displaying the first effect result in the first ready-to-win effect, a special pattern for displaying the first effect result after once displaying the second effect result, and a special pattern for once displaying the second effect result without displaying the second effect result. It is possible to execute the first ready-to-win effect with a predetermined pattern for displaying the first effect result,
When displaying the first effect result in the second ready-to-win effect, the first effect result can be displayed by causing the specific display to act on the effect image of the second ready-to-win effect,
When displaying the first effect result in the first ready-to-win effect of the predetermined pattern, displaying the first effect result without causing the specific display to act on the effect image of the first ready-to-win effect,
When displaying the first effect result in the first ready-to-win effect of the special pattern, it is possible to display the first effect result by causing the specific display to act on the effect image of the first ready-to-win effect,
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
There is a reach with high expectations and a low reach as a reach production. In the first place, when a reach with a low degree of expectation appears, the player is disappointed with the reach. However, there is something that continues to be displayed during the reach production, and for reach with high expectations, a specific display is used during reach. But low-expectation reach remains unused. Expectations are naturally low, so it is easy to show deviations. However, since the specific display remains even when the wrong effect result is displayed, the expectation can be maintained even if the reach is wrong.

(Description of Second Form of Characteristic Portion 129SKY)
In the gaming machine of the second form, the specific display can be displayed in different display modes according to a plurality of stages, and the ratio of execution of the specific effect differs according to the display mode.
It is characterized by
According to such a feature, the player can expect whether or not the specific performance will be executed by the display mode, and it can be shown that the degree of expectation for the big win increases as the display mode changes. Therefore, the player can be entertained.

(Description of the third form of the characteristic portion 129SKY)
In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, in order to cause the specific display to act on the effect image, something like a mini character is displayed as an advance notice effect, and when the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display moves and acts on the effect image. Ru
It is characterized by
According to these characteristics,
A more powerful presentation can be performed by showing the specific display that is normally displayed to the player as part of the presentation.

(Description on the fourth form of the characteristic portion 129SKY)
In the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the specific display used in the specific effect is executed as an action promoting display,
It is characterized by
According to such features, it is possible to enhance the effect of the action promoting effect, and to prompt the player to promote the action of the detecting means.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 126SKY)
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of the characterizing portion 126SKY in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 13-1 to 13-12. FIG. 13-1 shows a state of approaching before the left and right decorative symbols with characters stop during fluctuations that are not controlled by the jackpot in the normal state in the embodiment of the characteristic part 126SKY. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of. FIG. 13-2 shows that when the decoration pattern of the character is in the ready-to-win state, the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the screen is switched to the normal screen after losing, the decoration pattern is already displayed in the close state. FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing that when the ready-to-win effect is executed and the screen is shifted to the normal screen once after the big win, the decorative symbols are in the close state. Figure 13-4 shows the state of fluctuation during right hitting (during variable probability state), and after the reach effect is executed and the big hit is announced, it is displayed before the reach effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing that the decoration pattern is not in the close state when the screen is shifted to the screen of the background that was displayed when the screen was shifted to the normal changing screen. FIG. 13-5 is an explanatory diagram showing that there are a plurality of types of display modes of characters when they are stopped in a close proximity state, even if they are decorative symbols with the same number. The actual machine is set so that 675 is displayed in the initial combination of decorative symbols displayed when the power is restored or when the power is turned on. FIG. 13-7 to FIG. 13-10 are explanatory diagrams showing that 675, which is the initial outcome, may be stopped as a combination of decoration symbols, and FIGS. It is a diagram and will be described later in detail. In addition, FIG. 13-11 shows that when a specific decorative pattern stops in a close state, a special effect for combining specific decorative patterns (FIG. 13-11 (G)) is executed, and FIG. 13-12 shows reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing that there are a plurality of decorative design patterns so that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the mode of the decorative design at the time.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(A), when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the decorative symbol of 126SKY001(a) is about to stop as the left decorative symbol. is.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(B), the decoration symbol of 126SKY001(a) shown in FIG. 13-1(A) is temporarily stopped in the left decoration symbol display area.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(C), after the decoration pattern of 126SKY001(a) shown in FIG. It is about to stop.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(D), the decoration symbol of 126SKY002(a) shown in FIG. 13-1(C) is temporarily stopped in the right decoration symbol display area.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(E), after the decorative patterns 126SKY001(a) and 126SKY002(a) shown in FIG. 13-1(D) temporarily stop in the left and right decorative pattern display areas, the middle decoration This is a state in which the symbols with only numbers are temporarily stopped in the symbol display area. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns are in a separated state.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(F), the decoration symbol of 126SKY001(a) temporarily stopped in the left decoration symbol display area shown in FIG. 13-1(E) and the right decoration symbol display area are temporarily stopped. 126SKY002(a) is moving closer to the center in such a manner as to hide the central decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-1 (G), in order to make it easier for the player to understand that the action of moving toward the center shown in FIG. This is a state suggesting that the

As shown in FIG. 13-1(H), after the effect shown in FIG. 13-1(G) is used, what is the aspect of the decorative design of 126SKY001(a) displayed in the left decorative design display area? It has changed to a different 126SKY001(b) pattern, and the 126SKY002(a) pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area has changed to a different 126SKY002(b) pattern. , which indicates that the left and right decoration patterns are different before and after the proximity state. At least during the stop, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed in such a manner that the inner pattern overlaps.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the decoration pattern is operated during the fluctuation in the normal state before performing the effect of hitting to the right after the big hit (see FIG. 10-7), It is such as to bring it into a close proximity state. As an effect, by making the central pattern smaller than the left and right decorative patterns in the limited liquid crystal space, the left and right decorative patterns can be made larger. It is possible to perform an effect such that the characters do so, giving an impact to the player and making the character stand out. In addition, if the decoration pattern is simply stopped, it will look boring to the player, so even though it is the same numeric character, by changing the pose and state, it is possible to make it look more interesting than the normal stopped state. In the embodiment, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed large, and the left and right 6 5 decorative patterns do not overlap, but the left and right decorative patterns are not limited to those separated, and the patterns overlap during fluctuation It is also possible to perform an action to bring an object close to the object.

In the present embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, the speed at which the characters enter the close state is changed by operating the decorative figure according to the number of holdings. When the reserved number is 1 or 2, the decoration pattern is operated at a standard speed to bring it into a close state. When the number of reserves is 3 to 4, the decoration pattern is operated at a speed faster than the standard and brought into a close state. As an effect, for example, it is well known in pachinko machines that shortening variation is performed when 3 or 4 holds (loss variation that does not reach reach) are accumulated, and even if the variation is shortened, it will be close to that amount. Since the motion is also made fast and the performance is completed even in a short variation time, the performance is more interesting than the performance in which even if the variation is shortened, it is stopped as it is without performing an approaching motion. In addition, depending on the mode, stage, and state, it is not necessary to operate the decoration pattern to bring it into the close state.

Next, FIG. 13-2 will be described. FIGS. 13-2(A) and 13-2(B) are the same flow as FIGS. 13-1(A) and 13-1(B), so they are omitted. As shown in FIG. 13-2(C), the decoration symbol of 126SKY001 is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area and the right decoration symbol display area, and the reach state is reached.

As shown in FIGS. 13-2(D) and (E), the decoration pattern shown in FIG. 13-2(C) is in the ready-to-win state, and the advanced ready-to-win effect 126SKY005 is being executed.
13-2 to 13-5 is a reach effect called "fishing challenge", and if the character is able to catch a fish by fishing, a big win is announced, and if not, a loss is reported. It is a reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-2(F), the ready-to-win effect shown in FIGS. be.

As shown in FIG. 13-2(G), after the ready-to-win effect result shown in FIG. 13-2(F) indicates a failure result, the eye catch of 126SKY006 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-2(H), after displaying the eye catch shown in FIG. ) is displayed in the close state in a manner different from the manner of the decoration pattern displayed in ). The different aspect means the aspect of the left decoration design of 126SKY007(a) and the aspect of the right decoration design of 126SKY007(b). Also, at this time, the decorative pattern described in FIG. 13-1(F) does not perform the operation 126SKY003 of moving toward the center in such a manner as to hide the central decorative pattern, and is in the close state.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an example of the ready-to-win effect in the normal state before the right-handed effect after the big hit (see FIG. 10-7) is shown. However, the pattern is in the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win production is executed. Then, after displaying the disengagement results, transition to the normal screen, in which the embodiment displays an eye catcher and transitions to the normal screen where 656 has already stopped in proximity. As an effect, the loss of the reach is performed with an effect, and the player can enjoy it with a sense of expectation. I often get discouraged because of the increase in . In other words, when the player is disappointed after the ready-to-win effect ends, if the decoration pattern described in FIG. , Since it becomes very troublesome, it is set so that the decoration pattern will not be operated again after the end of the ready-to-win effect. In this embodiment, the normal screen is displayed after the eye catch is displayed.

Since FIGS. 13-3(A) to (E) are the same flow as FIGS. 13-2(A) to (E), description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13-3(F), the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the result of the ready-to-win effect is 666, that is, the big hit result is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(G), after the ready-to-win effect result shown in FIG. 13-3(F) shows the big hit result, the eye catch of 126SKY006 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(H), the result of the big win shown in FIG. 13-2(G) is displayed, and after that eye-catching is displayed, the screen is returned to the normal state once. At that time, the left and right decorative patterns are in close proximity. (State 666) At this time, the numbers and characters of the symbols are the same, but the poses of the characters of the left decorative symbols and the right decorative symbols are different.

In FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 13-4(A), the background of 126SKY009 is displayed during right hitting (during high base), and the notification of right hitting is continuously displayed, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. This is a state in which the decorative symbols that are fluctuating in the display area are about to stop temporarily.

The drawing flow of FIGS. 13-4(B) and (C) overlaps with that of FIGS. 13-3(B) and (C) and is therefore omitted. As shown in FIG. 13-4(D), FIG. 13-4(C) shows a state in which a ready-to-win effect is developed after entering the ready-to-win state. A mini character of 126SKY010 suggests the degree of expectation by changing the color of the title display of "fishing challenge", or by changing the type of fish.

As shown in FIG. 13-4(E), this is a state in which the ready-to-reach effect of catching fish is being executed. At this time, it is possible to introduce a chance-up, such as a change in the type of fish and an increase in the degree of expectation, for example.

As shown in FIG. 13-4(F), 666 is displayed on the screen in a state in which a fish is caught in the reach effect for catching fish shown in FIG. 13-4(E). In other words, it is in a state of notifying that the jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 13-4(G), after the ready-to-win effect result shown in FIG. 13-4(F) shows the big hit result, the eye catch of 126SKY006 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-4(H), after announcing the result of 666 jackpots in FIG. 13-4(G), an eye catcher is displayed, and then the screen is returned to the screen during right-handed variation, and FIG. 13-3. As shown in (H), the left and right decorative patterns are not displayed in close proximity, and characters are added to the left, middle and right decorative patterns.

In the embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is performed during right-handed hitting, and after announcing that a big hit will occur, an eye catcher is displayed and the screen shifts to the background during right-handed fluctuation, but this is not necessarily the case. It does not have to be eye-catching, and for screen switching, character animation or a special effect image that appears only at the time of a big hit may be displayed. As an effect, the character of the medium pattern can be seen at the time of a big win during right-handed hitting, and the player can see the kind of decoration pattern unique to right-handed hitting, which enhances interest and makes the player pay more attention to the decoration pattern. be able to.

Since FIGS. 13-5(A) to (G) are the same as FIGS. 13-2(A) to (G), their description is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13-5(H), this is a state in which the eye-catch displayed in FIG. 13-2(G) is displayed after the ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-5(H), after displaying the eye catch shown in FIG. ) is displayed in the close state in a manner different from the manner of the decoration pattern displayed in ). 13-2 as the mode of the decorative design displayed here is a left decorative design that is further different from the mode of the left decorative design of 126SKY007(a) and the mode of the right decorative design of 126SKY007(b). 126SKY011(a) and the right decorative design mode 123SKY011(b) are displayed (decorative design of a sad character). Also, at this time, the decorative pattern described in FIG. 13-1(F) does not perform the operation 126SKY003 of moving toward the center in such a manner as to hide the central decorative pattern, and is in the close state.

Next, FIG. 13-6 will be described. 13-6(A) to (G) are the same as (A) to (G) of FIG. 13-1, only the difference (H) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 13-6(H), after the effect shown in FIG. 13-6(G) is used, what is the aspect of the decorative design of 126SKY001(a) displayed in the left decorative design display area? It has changed to a different 126SKY001(b) pattern, and the 126SKY002(a) pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area has changed to a different 126SKY002(b) pattern. , which indicates that the left and right decoration patterns are different before and after the proximity state. Also, due to this change, the decoration pattern has stopped at 675, but the number 675 is the initial number that is displayed when power is restored in this actual machine.

13-7 will now be described. As shown in FIGS. 13-7(A), (B), and (C), FIGS. 13-7(A), (B), and (C) show fluctuations in the normal state of the gaming machine. If the power is turned off for some reason during the fluctuation and the power is turned on again in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(E), after the power restoration work shown in FIG. , the power is restored in a state of being stopped in the proximity state of the initial roll (675). It may be changed depending on the mode or the stage whether or not to display the state in which the decoration pattern of the character is stopped in the close state when the power is restored.

13-8 will now be described. As shown in FIGS. 13-8 (A), (B) and (C), FIGS. 13-8 (A), (B) and (C) represent the variable probability state of the gaming machine. If the power is cut off due to some factor (for example, a power failure) during the fluctuation and the power is turned on again in FIG. I do.

As shown in Figure 13-8 (E), after the power restoration work shown in Figure 13-8 (D) is completed, the background that fluctuated in Figures 13-8 (A) to (C) is restored. However, the decoration pattern of the character is erased and only the initial number (675) is displayed.

13-9 and 13-10 will now be described. Figures 13-9 and 13-10 are diagrams showing the time chart of the screen display at the time of power failure restoration during the fluctuation of the normal state and the variable probability state, and as shown in Figure 13-9, when the ball wins the starting port, The variation of the special pattern is started, and the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 effect storage information, background designation (command indicating the game state such as normal state or probability variable state), command such as design information designation side, and an effect is performed in accordance with the command sent from the main side, as shown in the example of effects shown in (A) and (B). Perform production according to the command (variation time of special figure) sent from the main side. FIG. 13-9 (A) is a diagram during normal state fluctuation, and FIG. 13-9 (B) is a diagram during fluctuation of probability variable state. The time chart of FIG. 13-9 shows that power was interrupted during fluctuations such as those shown in these two presentation examples. FIG. 13-10 shows a time chart following the time chart of FIG. 13-9, and explains how the power is restored from the power outage. When the power is turned on while the power is off, it indicates that the power is being restored. At this time, power failure recovery designation, effect pattern designation, special figure 1, special figure 2 effect storage information command are transmitted from the main side. As described above in the "basic configuration" of the present embodiment, at the time of recovery, the game state before the power outage is read out based on the contents stored in the RAM 102, and the background image corresponding to the game state is transmitted by transmitting the background designation command. is displayed.
Immediately after the power is turned on, the fluctuation has not ended yet, so if the power is restored in the normal state, the background will remain normal and the decorative pattern will be restored in the initial appearance and in the close state. When the power is restored, the background is in a variable state and the decorative pattern is in the initial appearance, but the decorative pattern is restored in a state where it is not in a close state.

13-11 will now be described. As shown in FIG. 13-11(A), the left decorative design is temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area. The symbol is about to stop temporarily in the right decorative symbol display area.

As shown in FIG. 13-11(B), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern shown in FIG. 13-11(A) are temporarily stopped, and a specific character 126SKY017 is displayed. state.

FIGS. 13-11(C) to (F) are the same as the flow of FIGS. 13-1(E) to (H), so they are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 13-11(G), when the left and right decorative patterns are in close proximity and are temporarily stopped, a combination of decorative patterns is triggered by a specific character displayed in FIG. 13-11(B). Execute a special performance.

In the above embodiment as well, when the decorative pattern with 6 on the left (character Yume Yume) and the decorative pattern with 5 on the right (character Jam) are to perform some kind of performance together, the decorative patterns are in a close proximity state. , Development production, and since it is a state of being out as a result, the production may proceed to a relief production from there. The rescue effect here is a effect that becomes a hit after the result of losing once in the ready-to-win effect.
In the embodiment, after the exclusive effect of 126SKY018 in FIG. 13-11(G) is lost, a relief effect (jamm chance) is performed. Although not shown in the figure, if the game develops into a battle effect between two characters, a big win is achieved if the player wins, and if the roulette wheel is displayed and the game stops at a winning position, a big win is announced as a relief effect. (FIG. 13-11(H)) Each character's decoration pattern is provided with a dedicated development effect, relief effect, and the like. As an effect, the player can liven up the performance with various patterns depending on the decoration pattern, and the player can be entertained without getting bored. Although it is described that a specific character is used as a trigger to execute the exclusive effect, the specific character need not be the trigger, and the exclusive effect may be executed independently when the decorative pattern comes close.

13-12 will now be described. FIGS. 13-12 (A), (B) and (C) are diagrams showing the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the mode of decorative symbols at the time of reach. Expectations differ in the order of (A)<(B)<(C) as shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 13-12(A), the left and right characters are in the ready-to-reach state in the form of decorative symbols with their right hands raised. (Low expectations)

As shown in FIG. 13-12(B), the characters on the left and right sides show the ready-to-win state in the form of decorative symbols with both hands raised. (medium expectations)

As shown in FIGS. 13-12(C), the left and right characters are in the form of a decorative pattern in which they are playing pieces, showing the ready-to-win state. (high expectations)

As an example, only 6 decorative patterns are shown, but the degree of expectation may be similarly set for each decorative pattern in the decorative patterns of characters other than 6 as well.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 127SKY)
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of the characterizing portion 127SKY in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 13-13 to 13-15. Figure 13-13 is a diagram showing the pre-reach production that leads to Figures 13-21 and 13-23, which are highly anticipated. It is explanatory drawing which shows how to move. Details will be described later. FIGS. 13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams showing how a symbol moves to a predetermined position in a ready-to-win state with a low expectation among multiple ready-to-win games. FIGS. 13 to 15 are explanatory diagrams showing the degree of expectation according to the manner of movement of each reach and decoration pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the displayed pattern is in the process of creating a circle like 126SKY019 to show whether or not the pattern will reach the reach state. A character such as 126SKY020 is displayed in the background where the fanning effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 13-13(B), this is the state in which the final fan effect is performed to determine whether or not the symbol shown in FIG. 13-13(A) is in the reach state. In addition, the pattern may pass by as it is and it may not reach the reach state.

As shown in FIG. 13-13(C), it shows a state in which the final fan effect is executed to determine whether the symbol shown in FIG. 13-13(B) is in the ready-to-win state. When the ready-to-win state is reached, the symbols are enlarged and displayed on the screen, such as 126SKY022. This is a state in which an effect such as 126SKY022 is displayed to emphasize that a ready-to-win game has been achieved when the pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 13-13(D), after the pattern shown in FIG. 13-13(C) has reached the reach state, the pattern is in a state where the transparency is increased like 126SKY023. .

As shown in FIG. 13-13(E), by increasing the transparency of the pattern shown in FIG. From the enabled state, an introductory image of the character 126SKY024 and a voice of the character are generated, the name is displayed, and the image is displayed so that the player can understand it. Although not shown in the drawing, the animation consists of a plurality of scenes, and the same characters as those in the advance notice effect executed by the game machine appear in FIG. 13-13(E).

As shown in FIG. 13-13(F), after the introductory image shown in FIG. 13-13(E) is displayed, ready-to-win effects are performed. The introductory image displays an image related to a character such as 126SKY025 that plays an active role in the Reach production (a recollection scene leading to the Reach, an introductory movie of the character, etc.). At this time, the pattern that is in the reach state and has increased the degree of transparency is erased.

As shown in FIG. 13-13(G), the pattern that was erased just before the introductory image shown in FIG. 13-13(F) is finished is displayed again, and the ready-to-win effect is about to start.

As shown in FIG. 13-13(H), the erased pattern shown in FIG. 13-13(G) is displayed again, and the predetermined move to position.
The conspicuous aspect here is that in the embodiment, the movement time of the pattern is longer than the normal moving distance, and the normal movement of the pattern is linear movement, but it moves in zigzag It moves in a circular motion to attract the player's line of sight to a predetermined position. Also, when moving, the pattern may be covered with an effect display of a conspicuous warm color (red, etc.).
It should be noted that movement mode 1 is to move the decorative pattern to a predetermined position with low expected reach, and movement mode 2 and movement mode 3 are to move the decorative pattern conspicuously to the predetermined position with high expected reach. . Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13-15.

As in the first embodiment, the present embodiment is an example of a pre-reach effect in a normal state before performing a right-hand hitting effect after a big hit (see FIG. 10-7). As an effect, when executing a super reach using a certain character, after the pattern is in a reach state, an image related to the character (character introduction animation) is displayed, so that the super reach that will be performed from now on is displayed. can tell the player which character will play an active role as the contents of the . Furthermore, when an image related to a character is displayed, the character animation can be made more conspicuous by temporarily making the ready-to-reach pattern invisible. In this embodiment, since the degree of expectation varies greatly depending on the pattern in the ready-to-win state, the player is made to recognize the character that will play an active role in the super-ready to be held from now on, and an introductory movie of the character is played in the introductory part before the super-ready to go. , The pattern that was in a state of being difficult to see is displayed again. At that time, the pattern is moved in a more conspicuous mode than the mode of moving to a predetermined position when the pattern is in a ready-to-win state with a low degree of expectation. Since the patterns are moved in a conspicuous manner, the player can remember the patterns that have been made difficult to see, and can make the player pay attention to the movement of the patterns.

As shown in FIG. 13-14, the flow of FIGS. 13-14(A) to (C) is the same as that of FIGS. 13-2(A) to (C), so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 13-14(D), the pattern shown in FIG. 13-14(C) has moved to a predetermined position above the liquid crystal after being in the reach state. In FIG. 13-2, a diagram in which the pattern in FIG. 13-14 (D) moves to a predetermined position is omitted.

Since FIGS. 13-14 (E) to (H) are the same as FIGS. 13-2 (D) to (G), their description is omitted.

13-15 will now be described. FIGS. 13-15 are explanatory diagrams of the expected degree of each reach and symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13-15(A), it shows the reach state of the first reach (fishing challenge) with a low degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 13-15(B), it shows the reach states in the second reach state (soccer reach) with medium expectations and the third reach state (PK confrontation) with high expectations.

As shown in FIGS. 13-15(C), it is an explanatory view showing that the 6 decorative symbols move to a predetermined position in the movement mode 1 in the first reach state.

As shown in FIG. 13-15(D), it is an explanatory view showing that the decoration pattern of 6 moves to a predetermined position in the movement mode 2 in the second reach state.

As shown in FIGS. 13-15(E), it is an explanatory view showing that the decoration pattern of 7 moves to a predetermined position in the movement mode 1 in the first reach state.

As shown in FIGS. 13-15(F), it is an explanatory view showing that the decoration pattern of 7 moves to a predetermined position in the movement mode 3 in the second reach state.

As shown in the table of FIG. 13-15 (G), in the first reach (fishing challenge), the type of pattern is even number pattern, odd number pattern, 7 (specific number), but in movement mode 1 of decorative pattern The distance to the predetermined position is short, and the travel time is 0.5 seconds. In the second reach (soccer reach), even numbered patterns, odd numbered patterns, and 7 (specific number) are the types of patterns. 1 second is normal, 1.5 seconds is slightly longer for odd symbols, and 2 seconds is longer for 7. In the third reach (PK reach), if the type of pattern is an even pattern or an odd pattern, the movement mode of the decorative pattern is 2, and if it is 7 (specific pattern), the decorative pattern is in the movement mode 3. be. The moving distance to a predetermined position is normally 1 second for even-numbered symbols, slightly longer at 1.5 seconds for odd-numbered symbols, and 3 seconds for 7, which is the longest.

In this embodiment, in the first reach, the expectations are low in the first place, and the execution frequency is high. Since there is a possibility that it will be troublesome, in the first reach, the movement mode 1 is set regardless of the type of symbol. On the other hand, in the second reach and the third reach, the degree of expectation is higher than that in the first reach, and the frequency of execution is also low. In order to liven up the performance when the second reach and the third reach occur, the movement distance and time are changed according to the type of pattern in the performance before the reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute a performance that gives a sense of expectation.
Although the 7 symbols (specific symbols) are the symbols with the highest degree of expectation, any number with the highest degree of expectation on each actual machine may be used.

In this embodiment, the degree of expectation changes depending on the type of symbol rather than the type of reach. For example (1) 1st reach x 2 designs (even numbered designs) (2) 1st reach x 7 designs (specific designs) (3) 2nd reach x 2 designs (even numbered designs) (4) 2nd reach x 7 designs , the order of expectation is (4)>(2)>(3)>(1). That is, in this embodiment, since the degree of expectation depends on the symbols, the relation of the degree of expectation is 7 symbols of the first reach>2 symbols of the second reach.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 128SKY)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion 126SKY in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-16 to 13-19. FIGS. 13-16 to 16-19 are special lever effects executed during ready-to-win, which are examples of effects for enlivening the action-promoting effect. During the ready-to-win effect, an image simulating a gaming machine is displayed in the liquid crystal as a simulated gaming machine image, and the ready-to-win video is displayed on the liquid crystal image of the displayed simulated gaming machine image. By the player pulling the lever near the end of the effect, it is possible to notify whether the ready-to-win effect is a win or a loss. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of an action promoting performance for erasing the simulated gaming machine image displayed when the notification of pulling the lever is given and forcing the player to pull the lever; Details will be described later. FIGS. 13-20 are explanatory diagrams showing how the real-time video is displayed on the liquid crystal image in the simulated gaming machine image.

13-16 show an image (simulated gaming machine image) that imitates the game frames and liquid crystal of the gaming machine as they are, and the part corresponding to the liquid crystal display device in the simulated image (hereinafter referred to as is sometimes referred to as a liquid crystal image (126SKY028)). In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the special lever effect is executed in the second ready-to-win effect (soccer ready-to-win), but the special lever effect is not always executed in the second ready-to-win effect. As shown in 21 and FIGS. 13-22, when the character reaches the goal at the end of the second ready-to-win effect, that is, when the result of the second ready-to-win effect is displayed, an action promoting effect for the button (hereinafter referred to as normal promoting effect). ), and the player presses a button to notify the effect result of the second ready-to-win effect. Comparing the special lever effect and the normal promotion effect, the normal promotion effect displays the image of the second reach effect as usual until the operation valid period of the button. The image of the second ready-to-win effect displayed as it is displayed is displayed in the part of the liquid crystal image, and it is as if the image related to the ready-to-win effect being executed on the virtual game machine displayed in the liquid crystal is displayed in real time. is displayed as

FIG. 13-16(A) shows a state in which the reach effect is displayed in the liquid crystal image. It is a video.
A portion of the simulated game machine image of 126SKY029 is displayed on the liquid crystal at the end of the display area of the liquid crystal.

As shown in FIGS. 13-16 (A) and (B), the simulated game machine image is shown to move out of the liquid crystal and move in the depth direction. The image of the reach production that is in the direction of the depth direction is also shown to gradually move away. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 13-16(C), the flow of presentation is such that the entire image can be visually recognized gradually from the state in which a part of the simulated gaming machine image is visible. By adopting such a presentation structure, it is possible to make it appear as if the real liquid crystal is moving toward the back side of the game machine, thereby improving interest.

As shown in FIG. 13-16(C), the entire simulated game machine image is displayed in the liquid crystal, and the real-time second reach displayed in the liquid crystal image is displayed around the simulated game machine image. A plurality of images (126SKY030) obtained by blurring the production image are displayed at the same time. Since the special lever effect is a effect to the effect that the real liquid crystal moves in the depth direction along with the virtual game machines, the periphery of the simulated game machine image is originally a blank portion. However, if there is a blank portion, the appearance lacks flashiness, so there is a possibility that the impression of the performance given to the player may be diminished. In view of this problem, the gaming machine of the present embodiment enhances the rendering effect by displaying a plurality of blurred images that are originally displayed in the second ready-to-win rendering around the simulated gaming machine image. there is By blurring the image, it is possible to differentiate the image from the image displayed in the liquid crystal image portion and direct the player's line of sight to the side of the simulated game machine while maintaining the flashiness of the performance. Note that the image displayed in the surroundings is not limited to this, and may be, for example, character information (such as characters' words) or an effect image.

As shown in FIGS. 13-17(A) and (B), the simulated gaming machine image shown in FIG. 13-16(C) is rotated within the liquid crystal and various vertical movements are performed. While the simulated gaming machine image is moving in the liquid crystal, the lamps of the lever and the game frame do not emit light on the image, but the lever and the game frame of the main gaming machine are controlled so that the lamps emit light. Also, although the lever does not vibrate on the image of the simulated game machine, the lever of the main game machine is controlled to vibrate. By operating the simulated game machine image in this way, it is possible to create an impactful presentation, and the simulated game machine image does not forcefully express the light emission of the lamps and the vibration of the lever in the actual game machine main body. , I try not to make it look overly complicated.

As shown in FIGS. 13-18 (A) and (B), the lever of the simulated gaming machine image is used in order to execute the action promoting effect of the lever for judging the success shown in FIG. 13-17 (B). The part is shown to gradually move to the front of the liquid crystal, and when it comes to the front, the characters "lever" are displayed.

Up to FIG. 13-18(A), a plurality of image data displayed as liquid crystal images are displayed in the liquid crystal, but at the timing of FIG. When the character "" appears, it is erased. By doing so, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the movement by the displayed characters, and the player can put more effort into promoting the movement.
Although the lever is displayed on the liquid crystal display, it is controlled so that it does not react even if the lever of the game machine is operated. As an effect, since the lever is displayed on the liquid crystal for the player, when the player is casually moving the lever, the lever senses it, and before going to the action promotion effect, which is the feature of this case, the reach effect is performed. Since there is a risk that the operation will end, the lever is controlled so as not to detect it at the time of FIG. 13-18(B).

As shown in FIGS. 13-19 (A) and (B), when the lever of the simulated gaming machine image shown in FIG. Only the lever is displayed in the liquid crystal, and it is designed to prompt the action prompting effect to pull the lever. At this time, by displaying the letters and characters of "close", the promotion of the action is emphasized. FIG. 13-19(B) indicates that the soccer ball has entered the goal after the action of the lever is accelerated, that is, a big hit. FIG. 13-25(D), which will be described later, is the continuation of FIG. 13-19(B).

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an action promoting effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect in the normal state before performing the effect during hitting to the right after a big hit (see FIG. 10-7) is an example. As an effect, the actual machine (simulated game machine image) and the video inside the actual machine (in the liquid crystal image) run in real time in the liquid crystal in the action promotion effect at the time of the pass/fail judgment, making it possible to produce a more realistic effect. Therefore, motion promotion with presence can be performed.
It should be noted that when the simulated gaming machine image leaves the liquid crystal and moves in the depth direction, not only the pattern but also the pending display moves. In addition, the display of the advance notice effect (such as the suggestion of the expected degree of reach when a character appears, the suggestion of the appearance of a lever at the time of success or failure, etc.) is erased when the simulated game machine image moves in the depth direction.

Reference is made to FIGS. 13-20. FIGS. 13-20 are explanatory diagrams showing how the video of the third ready-to-win effect flowing in real time in the simulated game machine image and the liquid crystal image is displayed during the ready-to-win effect described above. In a game machine, a plurality of layers are superimposed to form an effect when an effect image is played. A layer configuration for displaying the ready-to-win effect of the present embodiment will be described. The display layer is roughly divided into three layers: the upper layer (hereinafter referred to as layer (A)), the middle layer (hereinafter referred to as layer (B)), and the lower layer (hereinafter referred to as layer (C)). The above three layers overlap and constitute the reach effect. In the present embodiment, the above three layers will be described as representatives in order to explain the special lever effect, but the description of layers related to other effects will be omitted.

Layer (A) in FIGS. 13-20 will be described. The layer (A) displays an image (movie) of a simulated gaming machine, and the liquid crystal image portion of the simulated gaming machine is in a hollowed-out state, and the rear layer (B) is reflected in the liquid crystal image portion. ing.

Layer (B) in FIGS. 13-20 will be described. The layer (B) displays the image data of the real-time ready-to-win effect displayed on the liquid crystal while deforming the shape of the image data so as to fit in the liquid crystal image portion in the simulated game machine.

FIG. 13-20 layer (C) will be explained. Layer (C) is image data displayed in the background portion around the simulated gaming machine image. A plurality of image data displayed on the liquid crystal image section are displayed. By displaying the image data displayed in the liquid crystal image part also in the background part of the layer (C), the player can easily grasp that the image is flowing in real time, and the interest of the ready-to-win effect can be enhanced. can.
In the embodiment, a plurality of image data displayed in the background are blurred, but the blurring is not always necessary, and it is enough for the player to know that the video is being displayed in real time.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 129SKY)
13-21 to 13-22 are described. Figures 13-21 and 13-22 show the effects during reach (third reach) with the subject of soccer penalty kicks. A specific effect in which an active display (also referred to as the suspension and a soccer ball in the embodiment) corresponding to the variation being executed, which is different from the suspension display displayed in the suspension display area during reach, is used as part of the performance. is an explanatory diagram showing that it is a reach of a big hit if a goal is set. The particular effect that becomes a part of the production is that in the third reach, the suspension during the third reach production acts as a part of the production of the third reach production that is being executed (action of kicking the soccer ball). (The ball is thrown according to the kick of the character in the background.)
13-23 to 13-25 are described. FIG. 13-23 shows a soccer confrontation reach (second reach) with a lower expectation than the third reach, and in the second reach effect, it is unlikely that a specific effect using the hold will be executed during the reach effect. It shows that the suspension is part of the effect that is being executed only during the relief effect, and the relief effect is executed. Reference is made to FIGS. 13-26. FIG. 13-26 is an explanatory diagram showing the time charts of the second reach and the third reach and the execution frequencies of the specific effects and relief effects.

As shown in FIG. 13-21(A), the reach title (PK showdown) of 126SKY031 is announced, and the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of asterisks under the title. Here, the active display mode is a soccer ball, but it can be changed depending on the production mode, and there are multiple types of reach corresponding to the second reach production. In the ready-to-win effect, the display mode of the active display acting on the ready-to-win effect may be changed according to the type of ready-to-win, such as volleyball instead of the active state.
Also, when the reach title is displayed, the title color may be changed to make it appear as if the degree of expectation has increased.

As shown in FIG. 13-21(B), it indicates that the ready-to-win effect has started. Since the content of the reach is a penalty shootout, the character Yume (hereafter referred to as Yume) of 126SKY032 is about to kick the ball, and the keeper is moving left and right.

As shown in FIG. 13-21(C), the suspension displayed in the suspension display area during the ready-to-win effect moves to the center of the screen as the character moves during the ready-to-win effect, and the specific effect is about to be executed. It shows how it is.

As shown in FIG. 13-21(D), this is a state in which a specific effect (effect using active) is about to be executed. The specific effect is performed by enlarging and displaying the dream on the liquid crystal. At this time, the character's exclusive voice may be generated or the color of the effect that is wrapped in active suspension may be changed (white → red).

As shown in FIG. 13-21(E), when the active hold (soccer ball) that was once up has fallen down, Yume Yume moves along with it. A chance-up effect of a character holding a sign behind may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 13-21(F), it is in a state of kicking an active hold that has fallen from above. Generate a voice at the timing of kicking (it's soccer!)

As shown in FIG. 13-21(G), according to Yume's kicking action, the hold is made to fly away. It's hard to see on the screen, but the soccer ball is kicking in the direction of the keeper. The fact that the suspension described above is acted and becomes a part of the production means that the active suspension operates in conjunction with the production being performed in the background.

As shown in FIG. 13-21(H), the screen of FIG. 13-21(G) is switched to show a flying soccer ball. At this time, the active hold displayed in the hold display area is erased.

As shown in Fig. 13-22 (A), it is a continuation from Fig. 13-21 (H). It produces a sense of presence and informs whether it is a hit or a miss. In the embodiment, the hit/fail button has a button promoting effect that looks like a flying soccer ball.

As shown in FIG. 13-22(B), the ball has entered the goal after the button promotion of FIG. 13-22(A) has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-22(C), when the soccer ball shown in FIG. 13-22(B) hits the goal, a big win (666 symbols are aligned) is reported.
In addition, when a specific performance using a hold is executed and a big win is achieved, the control is more likely to be in an advantageous state than when a normal button is used for a big win. (It is possible to re-promote the pattern, make it easier to enter the probability, etc.)

As shown in Fig. 13-23(A), the title of the second reach (soccer confrontation reach) explained above has been announced, and the degree of expectation is lower than that of the third reach, with three stars. is displayed. At the time of title, the title color may be changed to make it appear as if the degree of expectation has increased.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(B), it shows that the second reach has started, and Mengmu is chasing the 126SKY035 ball, which is different from holding. The pending display continues to be displayed without being erased during the reach.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(C), Mumu (character) chases the ball, and when it catches up with the ball, although it is difficult to see in the image on the screen, the action of kicking the ball toward the goal is performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(D), the image on the screen switches to show the ball flying toward the keeper and the goal.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(E), whether or not the ball shown in FIG. 13-23(D) will enter the goal is determined by action promotion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(F), this reach effect indicates that the ball was stopped and did not reach the goal.

As shown in FIGS. 13-23(G) and 13-23(H), if the ball is stopped and does not enter, it is once notified that it is a misplacement. As for the basic production flow, the ready-to-reach production ends here. At that time, when the ready-to-win performance ends, the screen is darkened and the pending display is erased.
In the present embodiment, when it is originally lost, the screen is darkened after the end of the ready-to-win effect shown above and the pending display is erased. Leave the display without erasing it. After that, as shown in FIG. 18-23(H), an effect image (such as a specific character displaying "Don't give up!!") is displayed to execute a relief effect. A specific character may appear and agitation may be performed with an effect of whether or not to execute a relief effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-24(A), it has been decided that the relief effect will be executed after displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 13-23(H), and the title has just been displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-24(B) and 13-24(C), after the ready-to-win title shown in FIG. 13-24(A) is reported, the ready-to-win presentation is started. A mini-character of 126SKY034 is made to appear after shifting to the ready-to-win production, and the character acts on the suspension, and the production is executed such that the suspension is kicked up.

13-24 (D) to (H) are the same, the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 13-25(A), whether or not the ball shown in FIG. 13-25(H) will enter the goal is determined by action promotion presentation.

As shown in FIGS. 13-25(B) and 13-25(C), after the action-promoting effect has been performed, a fanning effect is executed to determine whether or not a shot will be scored. There is also a pattern that fails here and the relief production fails. If successful, proceed to FIG. 13-25(C), where the goal is reached together with the keeper, which is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 13-25(D), when a big win is achieved by executing the relief effect using the hold shown in FIG. 13-25(C), the state is more advantageous than when a normal button wins. Easy to control. (It is possible to re-promote the pattern, make it easier to enter the probability, etc.)

This embodiment is an example of a ready-to-win effect in a normal state before the effect of hitting to the right after a big hit in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10-7). There are a second ready-to-win performance with a low expectation and a third ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation than the second ready-to-win performance. Since it is desired to show the effect to the player, the player can be entertained by executing a specific effect using a hold acting on the background image during the ready-to-win effect. On the other hand, in the second reach, the expectation is low and the specific effect using the hold is not executed during the reach, and there are more opportunities to see the deviation than in the third reach, so the player selects the second reach, Once the ready-to-win production starts, the player loses his sense of expectation. However, even at the moment when the failure was reported in the second reach effect (Fig. 13-23 (G) when a goal was not scored), the suspension continued to be displayed, and the expectation of using suspension as a relief effect remained. Even if it is the second ready-to-win performance with a low degree of expectation for the cage player, he can expect whether or not he will get a big win until the end, and can make him pay attention to the performance.

Next, FIG. 13-26(A) is a time chart showing execution timings of the specific effect and relief effect in the second ready-to-win effect and the third ready-to-win effect.
In the third reach (PK reach), a specific effect using a specific display is executed at the timing of scoring a goal (timing in Figure 13-21 (C) above), while in the second reach (soccer reach), a goal is scored. When a relief effect is executed without executing a specific effect using a specific display at the timing to be determined (timing such as the above-mentioned FIGS. 13-23 (C) to 13-23 (E)), the relief effect It can be seen that a specific effect is executed as
As shown in this time chart, the specific effect is not executed when the second reach results in a big hit without relief. In other words, the specific display that continues to be displayed is not used at the timing of winning in a normal pattern, not in a special pattern such as a relief effect. However, since the specific display is used at the timing of the relief effect after this, the expectation can be maintained for a long time even after the timing at which the success or failure of the normal pattern is notified.

From the table shown in FIG. 13-26(B), it can be seen that the specific effect is not executed during execution of the second ready-to-win effect, and the specific effect is executed during the third ready-to-win effect. By doing this about the execution ratio of the specific effect, as described above, the ratio of the big hit is originally lower than the third reach, and the second reach cannot sustain the player's expectation. , Creating a situation that makes us expect relief production at a later timing.
In the table shown in FIG. 13-26 (C), as described above, when the second reach is a big hit, the specific effect is not executed during the reach effect. This shows that the frequency of execution of the relief effect using the display is higher than the pattern using the other specific effect and the pattern using the specific effect (as illustrated, the pattern using the specific effect is the second pattern). not present in reach). When a big win is achieved in the third ready reach, the frequency of executing the specific performance during the ready reach performance is higher than in the second ready reach, and the execution frequency of the pattern in which the relief performance is executed is lower than in the second ready reach. ing. Furthermore, the pattern of winning by the relief effect is less frequent than the case of winning by other patterns (patterns not using specific effects and patterns using specific effects), and the third reach effect itself is the same as the second reach. Since it is a reach with a high degree of expectation in comparison, rather than increasing the frequency of winning by a relief performance pattern, the content of the original performance of the third reach is a big hit, and the player is reminded again that the degree of expectation is high for the performance of the third reach. It is designed to be recognizable. By adopting such a configuration of the execution frequency, while the second reach has a higher probability of losing in the first place than the third reach, it is possible to expect a relief effect, and a specific display used when executing the specific effect. continues to be displayed, even if the result of losing is shown at the timing when the winning or failing is announced in the normal pattern in the second reach, the displayed specific display makes the player aware of the relief effect and gives a sense of expectation. I'm creating a situation that keeps me going. In the second ready-to-win game, the relief effect is frequently executed, but there are cases where a big hit is achieved without using the specific effect.

FIG. 13-26(D) shows that the execution frequency of the specific effect and the relief effect changes depending on the display mode (color) of the specific display (hold) in the second reach and the third reach. The display mode of the specific display can be unchanged (default color), or can be changed to any one of blue, red, and rainbow colors. In the embodiment, changes in the display mode are represented by colors, but it may also be possible to indicate that the execution frequency of the specific effect changes due to changes in the mode of the specific display itself (for example, the size of the soccer ball increases). , the type of ball changes, etc.). By doing so, not only the change in color but also the change in the specific display can be noticed, thereby increasing the number of patterns during the ready-to-win effect and preventing the player from getting bored.
The specific display is during the execution of the second reach and the third reach, or in the stage before that (during normal fluctuation before reaching the reach state, when reaching the state, when normal reach is being executed, etc. ), the display mode can be changed, and depending on the display mode after the change, the frequency at which the relief effect using the specific display is executed differs from the frequency at which the specific effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 13-26(D), in the second reach, the frequency at which the relief effect using the specific display is executed increases in the order of no change<blue<red<rainbow, and the player prefers the display mode as much as possible. While wanting to change to red or rainbow as much as possible, the user pays attention to the specific display during the second reach effect. For example, when the goal is not scored in the second reach and the specific display is a rainbow, it is certain that the relief effect will be executed, and the player is notified of the loss. You can watch the performance with a sense of security. On the other hand, during the execution of the third reach, the frequency of the relief effect is set to "low" regardless of the display mode of the specific display, and the frequency of executing the specific effect using the specific display does not change<blue<red. <Increases in order of the rainbow.> By doing so, the player can watch the effects while expecting that the second reach will be a relief effect and the third reach will win with the original effect of the third reach.

As described above, the characteristic portion 126SKY ~ characteristic portion 129SKY have been described, but these characteristic portions are characteristic portions for the start of fluctuation in the normal state, time saving and probability variable state in the characteristic portion 20SH ~ fluctuation stop time, This game machine is equipped with all of them and implemented in a series of flows.

In addition, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of game balls are used in the game machine. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the embodiments, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and non-spherical game media such as medals can be used. may be

Further, in the embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, for example, using gaming values. At the same time, a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable patterns, thereby completing one game, and a prize is awarded according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. can also be applied to slot machines that can generate

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 11... Main board 12... Effect control board

Claims (1)

A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
a ready-to-win effect execution means for executing a ready-to-win effect suggesting control to the advantageous state after the identification information is in the ready-to-win state;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect after the identification information becomes the ready-to-win state and before the ready-to-win effect is executed;
Depending on the type of identification information that is in the reach state, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The ready-to-win performance includes a first ready-to-reach performance that is executed without executing the special performance and a second ready-to-reach performance that is executed after the special performance is executed and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first ready-to-reach performance. Including reach production and
The special effect executing means executes the special effect in a manner in which an image related to the character used in the second ready-to-win effect is displayed so that the displayed identification information is difficult to see,
When the first ready-to-win performance is executed, the identification information in the ready-to-win state is moved to a predetermined position in a first operation mode, and when the second ready-to-win performance is to be executed, the ready-to-win state is entered. moving the identification information to the predetermined position in a second operation mode that is more conspicuous than the first operation mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images